Manual: LV-ALSF

Manual: LV-ALSF
Instruction Manual
96A0400
Retain for future use.
Issued: 24 Jun 2008
Rev. J, 4/7/14
Designed according to FAA
Specification
FAA-E-2325 and FAA-E-2628
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Medium Intensity Approach
Lighting System and Approach
Lighting System with Sequenced
Flashers (Elevated and Inpavement Flashers)
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Disclaimer
Table of
Contents
This manual could contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. ADB Airfield Solutions reserves the right to
revise this manual from time to time in the contents thereof without obligation of ADB Airfield Solutions to notify any
person of such revision or change.
Details and values given in this manual have been compiled with care. They are not binding, however, and ADB
Airfield Solutions disclaims any liability for damages or detriments suffered as a result of reliance on the information
given herein or the use of products, processes or equipment to which this manual refers. No warranty is made that
the use of the information or of the products, processes or equipment to which this manual refers will not infringe any
third party's patents or rights.
Warranties
Safety
Products of ADB Airfield Solutions manufacturer are guaranteed against mechanical, electrical, and physical defects
(excluding lamps) which may occur during proper and normal use for a period of one year from the date of installation
or 2 years from date of shipment and are guaranteed to be merchantable and fit for the ordinary purposes for which
such products are made.
ADB Airfield Solutions will correct by repair or replacement, at its option, equipment or parts which fail because of
mechanical, electrical or physical defects, provided that the goods have been properly handled and stored prior to
installation, properly installed and properly operated after installation, and provided further that Buyer gives ADB
Airfield Solutions written notice of such defects after delivery of the goods to Buyer. Refer to the Safety section for
more information on Material Handling Precautions and Storage precautions that must be followed.
ADB Airfield Solutions reserves the right to examine goods upon which a claim is made. Said goods must be
presented in the same condition as when the defect therein was discovered. ADB Airfield Solutions furthers reserves
the right to require the return of such goods to establish any claim.
ADB Airfield Solutions’ obligation under this guarantee is limited to making repair or replacement within a reasonable
time after receipt of such written notice and does not include any other costs such as the cost of removal of defective
part, installation of repaired product, labor or consequential damages of any kind, the exclusive remedy being to
require such new parts to be furnished.
ADB Airfield Solutions’ liability under no circumstances will exceed the contract price of goods claimed to be defective.
Any returns under this guarantee are to be on a transportation charges prepaid basis. For products not manufactured
by, but sold by ADB Airfield Solutions, warranty is limited to that extended by the original manufacturer.
This is ADB Airfield Solutions’ sole guarantee and warranty with respect to the goods; there are no express warranties
or warranties of fitness for any particular purpose or any implied warranties of fitness for any particular purpose or any
implied warranties other than those made expressly herein. All such warranties being expressly disclaimed.
Introduction Installation
Trademarks
General notice: other product names used here are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their
respective companies.
Operation
Proprietary Information
Parts
This information carrier contains proprietary information, which shall not be used for other purposes than those for
which it has been released, nor be reproduced or disclosed to third parties without the prior written consent of ADB
Airfield Solutions.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means,
mechanical, photocopy, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ADB Airfield Solutions. No
patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Neither is any liability assumed
for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein.
ADB Airfield Solutions shall not be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for damages, losses, costs,
or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of accident, misuse, or abuse of this product or
unauthorized modifications, repairs, or alterations to this product. ADB Airfield Solutions shall not be liable against
any damages arising from the use of any options or parts other than those designated as approved products.
Copyright  2010 by ADB Airfield Solutions. All rights reserved.
Schematics
ii
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
TOC
Disclaimer
1.0: Safety ...................................................................................................................1
Table of
Contents
1.1 :To use this equipment safely: .............................................................................. 1
1.1.1 :Additional Reference Materials: .................................................................. 1
1.1.2 :Qualified Personnel .....................................................................................1
1.1.3 :Intended Use ............................................................................................... 1
1.1.4 :Storage ........................................................................................................1
1.1.4.1 :Operation ............................................................................................ 2
1.1.4.2 :Material Handling Precautions ............................................................ 2
1.1.4.3 :Action in the Event of a System or Component Malfunction............... 2
1.1.4.4 :Maintenance and Repair..................................................................... 2
1.1.4.5 :Operation of Overloaded Regulators .................................................. 2
Safety
2.0: Introduction .........................................................................................................3
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Schematics
Parts
Operation
Installation Introduction
TOC
2.1 :Compliance with Standards ................................................................................. 3
2.1.1 :Theory of Operation .....................................................................................3
2.1.2 :ALSF System ............................................................................................... 4
2.1.2.1 :ALSF Uses.......................................................................................... 4
2.1.2.2 :ALSF-1................................................................................................ 4
2.1.2.3 :ALSF-2................................................................................................ 4
2.1.2.4 :ALSF-2/SSALR ................................................................................... 5
2.1.2.5 :SSALR Mode ...................................................................................... 5
2.1.3 :MALSR System ........................................................................................... 6
2.1.3.1 :MALSR Uses ...................................................................................... 6
2.1.3.2 :Environmental Operating Conditions .................................................. 7
2.1.3.3 :Features.............................................................................................. 7
2.1.4 :MALSR/ALSF: Required Equipment ........................................................... 8
2.1.5 :Additional equipment may be required, and must be ordered separately: .. 8
2.1.6 :Some Useful Terms and Definitions ............................................................ 9
2.1.7 :Master Control Cabinet ................................................................................ 9
2.1.8 :Equipment Data 
(Master Control Cabinet) ....................................................................................... 9
2.1.8.1 :Gross Weight and Dimensions ........................................................... 9
2.1.9 :Master Input Power Requirement .............................................................. 10
2.1.10 :Flasher ..................................................................................................... 10
2.1.10.1 :Elevated Flash Head (UEL) ............................................................ 10
2.1.10.2 :Type FFL In-pavement Flasher 
(MALSR and ALSF) ....................................................................................... 10
2.1.10.3 :In-pavement and Elevated Flasher Fixture Equipment Data .......... 10
2.1.11 :Individual Control Cabinet (ICC) .............................................................. 11
2.1.12 :Aiming Devices ........................................................................................ 11
2.1.12.1 :Elevated PAR-38/56 Steady-Burning Lamps.................................. 11
2.1.12.2 :Elevated Type UEL Flashing Lamps .............................................. 11
2.1.13 :Flasher Tester ......................................................................................... 11
2.1.14 :Junction Box ............................................................................................ 11
2.1.15 :FAA Spare Parts Trunk ........................................................................... 11
2.2 :MALSR Steady-Burning Light Components ....................................................... 12
2.2.1 :MALSR Lamp Holders ............................................................................... 12
2.2.1.1 :PAR-38 Lamp Holder........................................................................ 12
2.2.1.2 :PAR-56 Lamp Holder........................................................................ 12
2.2.2 :MALSR 15kVA Power Transformer ........................................................... 12
2.3 :MALSR Ordering Information ............................................................................. 13
2.4 :ALSF Ordering Information ................................................................................ 14
2.5 :Specifications ..................................................................................................... 15
2.5.1 :Commissioning Records ............................................................................ 15
2.5.2 :Default Settings Multi-wire ......................................................................... 16
2.5.3 :Customized Settings Multi-wire ................................................................. 17
2.6 :Technical Data ................................................................................................... 18
2.6.1 :Operational Limits ...................................................................................... 18
iii
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
TOC
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
2.6.1.1 :Temperature range ........................................................................... 18
2.6.1.2 :Humidity range .................................................................................. 18
2.6.1.3 :Input voltage range ........................................................................... 18
2.6.1.4 :Rated frequency................................................................................ 18
2.6.1.5 :Power consumption........................................................................... 18
2.6.1.6 :Multi-wire Control signals .................................................................. 18
2.6.1.7 :EMC conformity................................................................................. 19
2.6.2 :Mechanical Data ........................................................................................19
2.6.2.1 :Individual Control Cabinet ................................................................. 19
2.7 :ADB ALSF / MALSR System Specifications .......................................................20
2.7.1 :Master Control Cabinet ..............................................................................20
2.7.1.1 :Maintenance Features on Control Cabinet ....................................... 20
2.7.2 :Aiming Device ............................................................................................20
2.7.3 :Junction Box ..............................................................................................20
2.7.4 :PAR-38 Lampholders (MALSR Only) ........................................................20
2.7.5 :PAR-56 Lampholders 
(MALSR and ALSF) .............................................................................................21
2.7.6 :15 kVA Power Transformer (MALSR Only) ...............................................21
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
TOC
3.0: Installation of the System.................................................................................23
Operation
3.1 :Overview ............................................................................................................24
3.1.1 :Preparation of the Flashing Equipment .....................................................24
3.1.1.1 :Action 1: Unpacking .......................................................................... 24
3.1.1.2 :Action 2: Identification of the ICC cabinets ....................................... 24
3.1.1.3 :Action 3: Identification of the MCC.................................................... 24
3.1.1.4 :Action 4: Prepare circuit boards ........................................................ 24
3.1.2 :Preparation for Installation .........................................................................26
3.1.2.1 :Concrete slabs .................................................................................. 26
3.1.3 :Contractor ..................................................................................................27
3.2 :Physical Installation ............................................................................................28
3.2.1 :Mechanical Mounting and Electrical Connections .....................................28
3.2.1.1 :Unpacking the Equipment ................................................................. 28
3.2.2 :Installing Master Control Cabinet ...............................................................28
3.2.3 :Installing the Individual Control Cabinets ...................................................29
3.2.4 :Mounting Junction Box ..............................................................................29
3.2.5 :Installation of ICC 1 or ICC 3 .....................................................................29
3.3 :Electrical Connections ........................................................................................32
3.3.1 :Power Supply Cable ..................................................................................32
3.3.2 :Local Bus Data Line Interlinking Cables ....................................................32
3.3.2.1 :Connection ........................................................................................ 32
3.3.2.2 :Cable................................................................................................. 33
3.3.2.3 :Remote control connections.............................................................. 33
3.3.2.4 :External temperature sensor cable ................................................... 33
3.3.2.5 :Earth to ground connection ............................................................... 33
3.3.3 :Cabling Preconditions ................................................................................34
3.3.4 :Mounting Power Transformer (MALSR Only) ............................................36
3.3.5 :Installing Lightning Rod .............................................................................37
3.3.6 :Installing In-pavement Flasher on the Base and ICC Cable Connections .37
3.3.7 :Connecting the In-pavement Flashing Light ..............................................38
3.3.8 :Mounting the Flashing Lights .....................................................................40
3.3.8.1 :Installation on L-868 Base................................................................. 40
3.3.9 :Wiring the Master Control Cabinet .............................................................41
3.3.10 :To Wire the Individual Control Cabinet ....................................................42
3.3.11 :Wiring 15 kVA Power Transformer (MALSR Only) ..................................42
3.4 :Aiming the UEL Lamp holders ............................................................................42
3.4.1 :Bubble Level Aiming Device ......................................................................42
3.4.1.1 :Adjusting Horizontal .......................................................................... 43
3.4.2 :Electronic Aiming Device ...........................................................................44
Parts
Schematics
iv
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
TOC
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
v
Safety
Installation Introduction
TOC
Operation
4.1 :Interlock Switches .............................................................................................. 53
4.2 :Local and Remote Control ................................................................................. 53
4.3 :Master Control Cabinet Controls and Indicators ................................................ 53
4.4 :Ground Fault Interpreter ..................................................................................... 53
4.5 :Controls and Indicators ...................................................................................... 54
4.5.1 :Configuration ............................................................................................. 56
4.5.2 :Before you start ......................................................................................... 56
4.5.3 :Manual configuration ................................................................................. 56
4.5.3.1 :Action 1: Configuration of the ICCs .................................................. 56
4.5.3.2 :Action 2: Configuration of the MCC (PCB)........................................ 56
4.5.3.3 :For 32 ICCs, all switches must be set to OFF. ................................ 57
4.5.4 :Configuration via the Dongle ..................................................................... 59
4.5.4.1 :Action 1: Configuration of the ICCs .................................................. 59
4.5.4.2 :Action 2: Configuration of the MCC (Local Master PCB) .................. 59
4.5.4.3 :Action 3: Connect the dongle & define the layout through the software 59
4.5.4.4 :Action 4: Software based configuration ............................................ 59
4.5.4.5 :Action 5: Definition of the Inputs and Outputs ................................. 62
4.5.5 :Configuration of the REIL/RTIL system ..................................................... 63
4.5.5.1 :SFL including a RTIL (Runway Threshold Identification) system: .... 63
4.5.5.2 :REIL (Runway End Identification) or RTIL only system .................... 63
4.5.6 :Technical Description of the Control Cabinets, System Components and Available
Options ................................................................................................................ 64
4.5.6.1 :Individual Control Cabinets (ICC) ..................................................... 64
4.5.6.2 :Master Control Cabinet (MCC) ......................................................... 64
4.5.6.3 :Configuration .................................................................................... 64
4.5.6.4 :Installation options ............................................................................ 64
4.6 :Operating Principle ............................................................................................. 65
4.7 :Lightning Protection ........................................................................................... 66
4.7.1 :Flasher system .......................................................................................... 66
4.7.2 :External wiring ........................................................................................... 66
4.7.3 :Local bus input .......................................................................................... 66
4.8 :ICC (Individual Control Cabinet) FCU PCB 1487 ............................................... 67
4.8.1 :FCU PCB Fuse .......................................................................................... 67
4.8.1.1 :Jumpers ............................................................................................ 68
4.8.1.2 :Dip-switches ..................................................................................... 69
4.8.1.3 :LEDs ................................................................................................. 70
4.9 :Local Bus Interface PCB 1498 ........................................................................... 71
4.10 :MCC (Local Master) PCB 1485 ........................................................................ 71
4.10.1 :Protections ............................................................................................... 72
4.10.2 :Start-up and scanning ............................................................................. 72
4.10.3 :Synchronization ....................................................................................... 72
4.10.4 :Real-time measurements ........................................................................ 72
4.10.5 :PCB 1485 Jumpers ................................................................................. 73
4.10.6 :Rotary and Dip-switches .......................................................................... 74
4.10.7 :LEDs ........................................................................................................ 76
4.11 :Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486 ...................... 77
4.11.1 :Control signals and back-indication ......................................................... 77
4.11.2 :FCU Multi-wire I/O Configuration for the FAA Market ............................. 78
Parts
4.0: Operation .......................................................................................................... 53
Table of
Contents
Disclaimer
3.4.3 :Commissioning .......................................................................................... 44
3.5 :Aiming the PAR-56 Lamp holders ...................................................................... 45
3.5.1 :Assembling the Aiming Device .................................................................. 45
3.5.1.1 :Aiming Lamp holders (Conduit or Pipe Mounted) ............................. 47
3.5.1.2 :Aiming the Lamp holders (Tower Mounted) ..................................... 48
3.5.2 :Aiming PAR-38 Lamp holders (MALSR Only) ........................................... 50
3.5.2.1 :Adjusting Horizontal ......................................................................... 50
3.5.2.2 :Adjusting Vertical ............................................................................. 51
Schematics
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
TOC
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
4.11.2.1 :Functions......................................................................................... 78
4.11.2.2 :Input connector P2: remote control command signals .................... 79
4.11.2.3 :Modes of operation ......................................................................... 80
4.11.2.4 :Output functions .............................................................................. 81
4.11.2.5 :Back-indication Modes of operation ................................................ 82
4.11.3 :Manual Configurations Overview .............................................................84
4.11.3.1 :Configuring the 400V MALSR 5-Light Sequenced Flasher System 84
4.11.3.2 :Configuring the Jumpers of the Multi-Wire Board ........................... 86
4.11.3.3 :Multiwire .......................................................................................... 87
4.11.3.4 :Flasher Controller Unit (FCU) Board............................................... 88
4.11.3.5 :Configuring the Jumpers ................................................................. 88
4.11.3.6 :Flasher Control Unit (FCU) Board LEDs ......................................... 89
4.11.4 :External Temperature Probe ...................................................................89
4.11.5 :Dongle .....................................................................................................90
4.11.5.1 :LEDs ............................................................................................... 90
4.11.5.2 :Cable layout .................................................................................... 91
4.11.5.3 :Dip-switch bank............................................................................... 91
4.12 :Initial Software Installation and Software Use ..................................................92
4.12.1 :Configuration tool .....................................................................................92
4.12.1.1 :Install the configuration tool ............................................................ 92
4.12.1.2 :System requirements: ..................................................................... 92
4.12.1.3 :Configuration tool package: ............................................................ 92
4.12.1.4 :Install software ................................................................................ 92
4.12.1.5 :Connect cables ............................................................................... 92
4.12.1.6 :Start software .................................................................................. 92
4.12.2 :Upload New Software ..............................................................................93
4.12.2.1 :Control menu................................................................................... 96
4.12.2.2 :Mode menu ..................................................................................... 96
4.12.2.3 :Flasher data menu .......................................................................... 96
4.13 :Starting Up .......................................................................................................99
4.13.1 :Open all the Doors of the ICC Cabinets and the MCC ............................99
4.14 :Shutdown Procedures ....................................................................................100
4.14.1 :Emergency Shutdown ............................................................................100
4.14.2 :Equipment Shutdown .............................................................................100
4.14.2.1 :Master Control Cabinet Switches Shutdown................................. 100
4.14.2.2 :Individual Control Cabinet Shutdown ............................................ 100
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
TOC
Operation
Parts
5.0: Maintenance.....................................................................................................101
Schematics
5.1 :Replacement of the ICC Board .........................................................................101
5.1.1 :Replacement of the Electrolytic Capacitor ...............................................101
5.1.2 :Replacement of the DC power Supply .....................................................101
5.2 :Replacement Optional Over-voltage Protection ...............................................102
5.3 :Local Master Controller (LMC) and remote control PCBs ................................102
5.3.1 :LMC .........................................................................................................102
5.3.2 :Multiwire ...................................................................................................103
5.3.3 :Multiwire cable .........................................................................................103
5.4 :ALSF/MALSR Maintenance ..............................................................................104
5.4.1 :Maintenance Schedule ............................................................................104
5.4.2 :Maintenance Procedures .........................................................................107
5.4.2.1 :Checking System Performance....................................................... 107
5.4.3 :Checking System Voltage ........................................................................107
5.4.3.1 :Checking the Master Control Cabinet Voltages .............................. 107
5.4.3.2 :Checking the Individual Control Cabinet Voltages .......................... 107
5.4.4 :Checking the Equipment Visually ............................................................108
5.4.4.1 :Checking the Electrical Connections............................................... 108
5.4.5 :In-pavement Flashing Light .....................................................................108
5.4.5.1 :How to open the light assembly ...................................................... 108
5.4.5.2 :How to replace a lamp .................................................................... 109
vi
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
TOC
Operation
Installation Introduction
TOC
Safety
Table of
Contents
Disclaimer
5.4.5.3 :How to replace the trigger and lampholder PCBs........................... 109
5.4.5.4 :How to close and test the light fixture ............................................. 110
5.4.5.5 :Retorquing the Mounting Bolts on the In-pavement Flasher........... 111
5.4.6 :Individual Control Cabinets (ICCs) .......................................................... 112
5.4.6.1 :Preventive maintenance tasks ........................................................ 112
5.4.7 :Flashing Sequence .................................................................................. 112
5.4.8 :3-in-1 ICC AC Current Check .................................................................. 112
5.5 :UEL Light Maintenance .................................................................................... 113
5.5.1 :Preventive Maintenance ......................................................................... 113
5.5.2 :How to Replace the UEL Lamp .............................................................. 113
5.5.3 :How to Dismantle the Optical Assembly ................................................. 114
5.6 :Troubleshooting and Fault Correction .............................................................. 117
5.6.1 :General Troubleshooting Tips ................................................................. 117
5.6.1.1 :Preparation ..................................................................................... 117
5.6.1.2 :Gather information about the problem ............................................ 117
5.6.1.3 :Do the easy checks first.................................................................. 117
5.6.2 :Troubleshooting: System fails to flash .....................................................118
5.6.2.1 :At the Master Control Cabinet, verify that: ...................................... 118
5.6.2.2 :Verify that communication is present on the local bus.................... 118
5.6.2.3 :At each ICC cabinet, verify that: ..................................................... 118
5.6.2.4 :If the optional Modbus control is present: ....................................... 118
5.6.3 :Troubleshooting: Several units fail to flash .............................................. 118
5.6.3.1 :Verify at the first failing ICC cabinet that:........................................ 118
5.6.3.2 :Verify that communication is present on the local bus.................... 118
5.6.4 :Troubleshooting: One unit fails to flash ...................................................118
5.6.4.1 :Verify on the failing ICC cabinet that: ............................................. 118
5.6.4.2 :Verify that communication is present on the local bus.................... 118
5.6.4.3 :Then:............................................................................................... 118
5.6.5 :Troubleshooting:
One unit flashes incorrectly (intensity or timing) ................................................119
5.6.5.1 :Verify on the failing ICC cabinet that: ............................................. 119
5.6.5.2 :Verify that communication is present on the local bus.................... 119
5.6.5.3 :Then:............................................................................................... 119
5.6.6 :UEL Light Assemblies ............................................................................. 119
6.0: Parts ................................................................................................................121
Schematics
Parts
6.1 :MALSR Parts List ............................................................................................. 122
6.1.0.1 :MALSR Master Control Cabinet Specific Parts List ........................ 126
6.1.1 :Steady Burning Elevated Light Assembly Parts List ................................ 127
6.1.1.1 :MALSR PAR-56 Lampholder Assembly Parts List ......................... 127
6.1.1.2 :MALSR PAR-38 Lampholder Assembly Parts List ......................... 127
6.1.2 :MALSR/ALSF In-pavement Flasher Parts List ........................................ 128
6.2 :Optional Parts .................................................................................................. 130
6.2.1 :Optional Items ......................................................................................... 130
7.0: Schematics ...................................................................................................... 131
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
vii
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
TOC
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
TOC
Operation
Parts
Schematics
viii
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
This section contains general safety instructions for installing and using ADB Airfield Solutions equipment. Some
safety instructions may not apply to the equipment in this manual. Task- and equipment-specific warnings are
included in other sections of this manual where appropriate.
1.1 To use this
equipment safely:
Disclaimer
1.0 Safety
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Safety
WARNING
•
•
•
•
•
1.1.2 Qualified Personnel
The term qualified personnel is defined here as individuals who thoroughly understand the equipment and its safe
operation, maintenance and repair. Qualified personnel are physically capable of performing the required tasks,
familiar with all relevant safety rules and regulations and have been trained to safely install, operate, maintain and
repair the equipment. It is the responsibility of the company operating this equipment to ensure that its personnel meet
these requirements.
Always use required personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical work practices.
Safety
Installation Introduction
Safety
1.1.1 Additional Reference
Materials:
Table of
Contents
Read installation instructions in their entirety before starting installation.
• Refer to the FAA Advisory Circular AC 150/5340-26, Maintenance of Airport Visual Aids Facilities, for
instructions on safety precautions.
• Observe all safety regulations. To avoid injuries, always disconnect power before making any wiring
connections or touching any parts. Refer to FAA Advisory Circular AC 150/5340-26.
• Become familiar with the general safety instructions in this section of the manual before installing,
operating, maintaining or repairing this equipment.
• Read and carefully follow the instructions throughout this manual for performing specific tasks and
working with specific equipment.
• Make this manual available to personnel installing, operating, maintaining or repairing this equipment.
• Follow all applicable safety procedures required by your company, industry standards and government
or other regulatory agencies.
• Install all electrical connections to local code.
• Use only electrical wire of sufficient gauge and insulation to handle the rated current demand. All wiring
must meet local codes.
• Route electrical wiring along a protected path. Make sure they will not be damaged by moving
equipment.
• Allow ample room for maintenance, panel accessibility, and cover removal.
• Protect components from damage, wear, and harsh environment conditions.
• Protect equipment with safety devices as specified by applicable safety regulations.
• If safety devices must be removed for installation, install them immediately after the work is completed
and check them for proper functioning prior to returning power to the circuit.
Operation
NFPA 70B, Electrical Equipment Maintenance.
NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.
ANSI/NFPA 79, Electrical Standards for Metalworking Machine Tools.
OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1910, Occupational Health and Safety Standards.
National and local electrical codes and standards.
1.1.3 Intended Use
WARNING
Parts
Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual may result in personal injury, death or
property and equipment damage. Use this equipment only as described in this manual.
Schematics
ADB Airfield Solutions cannot be responsible for injuries or damages resulting from nonstandard, unintended
applications of its equipment. This equipment is designed and intended only for the purpose described in this manual.
Uses not described in this manual are considered unintended uses and may result in serious personal injury, death
or property and equipment damage. Unintended uses may result from taking the following actions:
• Making changes to equipment that are not recommended or described in this manual or using parts that are not
genuine ADB Airfield Solutions replacement parts.
• Failing to make sure that auxiliary equipment complies with approval-agency requirements, local codes and all
applicable safety standards.
• Using materials or auxiliary equipment that are inappropriate or incompatible with ADB Airfield Solutions
equipment.
• Allowing unqualified personnel to perform any task.
1.1.4 Storage
CAUTION
If equipment is to be stored prior to installation, it must be protected from the weather and kept free of
condensation and dust.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
1
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
To use this equipment safely:
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
1.1.4.1 Operation
WARNING
Table of
Contents
• Only qualified personnel, physically capable of operating the equipment and with no impairments in
their judgment or reaction times, should operate this equipment.
• Read all system component manuals before operating this equipment. A thorough understanding of
system components and their operation will help you operate the system safely and efficiently.
• Before starting this equipment, check all safety interlocks, fire-detection systems, and protective
devices such as panels and covers. Make sure all devices are fully functional. Do not operate the
system if these devices are not working properly. Do not deactivate or bypass automatic safety
interlocks or locked-out electrical disconnects or pneumatic valves.
• Protect equipment with safety devices as specified by applicable safety regulations.
• If safety devices must be removed for installation, install them immediately after the work is completed
and check them for proper functioning.
• Route electrical wiring along a protected path. Make sure they will not be damaged by moving
equipment.
• Never operate equipment with a known malfunction.
• Do not attempt to operate or service electrical equipment if standing water is present.
• Use this equipment only in the environments for which it is rated. Do not operate this equipment in
humid, flammable, or explosive environments unless it has been rated for safe operation in these
environments.
• Never touch exposed electrical connections on equipment while the power is ON.
Safety
Introduction Installation
To use this
equipment
safely:
1.1.4.2 Material Handling
Precautions
CAUTION
This equipment may contain electrostatic sensitive devices.
• Protect from electrostatic discharge.
• Electronic modules and components should be touched only when this is unavoidable e.g. soldering,
replacement.
• Before touching any component of the cabinet you should bring your body to the same potential as the
cabinet by touching a conductive earthed part of the cabinet.
• Electronic modules or components must not be brought in contact with highly insulating materials such
as plastic sheets, synthetic fiber clothing. They must be laid down on conductive surfaces.
• The tip of the soldering iron must be grounded.
• Electronic modules and components must be stored and transported in conductive packing.
Operation
1.1.4.3 Action in the Event of a
System or Component
Malfunction
WARNING
• Do not operate a system that contains malfunctioning components. If a component malfunctions, turn
the system OFF immediately.
• Disconnect and lock out electrical power.
• Allow only qualified personnel to make repairs. Repair or replace the malfunctioning component
according to instructions provided in its manual.
Parts
1.1.4.4 Maintenance and Repair
WARNING
Schematics
Allow only qualified personnel to perform maintenance, troubleshooting, and repair tasks.
• Only persons who are properly trained and familiar with ADB Airfield Solutions equipment are permitted
to service this equipment.
• Disconnect and lock out electrical power.
• Always use safety devices when working on this equipment.
• Follow the recommended maintenance procedures in the product manuals.
• Do not service or adjust any equipment unless another person trained in first aid and CPR is present.
• Connect all disconnected equipment ground cables and wires after servicing equipment. Ground all
conductive equipment.
• Use only approved ADB Airfield Solutions replacement parts. Using unapproved parts or making
unapproved modifications to equipment may void agency approvals and create safety hazards.
• Check interlock systems periodically to ensure their effectiveness.
• Do not attempt to service electrical equipment if standing water is present. Use caution when servicing
electrical equipment in a high-humidity environment.
• Use tools with insulated handles when working with electrical equipment.
1.1.4.5 Operation of
Overloaded Regulators
WARNING
• Operation of a Regulator while overloaded at any step may result in equipment failure or equipment
damage.
2
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
This section describes the ADB Airfield Solutions Medium intensity Approach Lighting
System with Runway alignment indicator lights (MALSR) and Approach Lighting System with
sequenced Flashers (ALSF).
2.1 Compliance with
Standards
FAA:
ALSF-1, ALSF-2, ALSF-2/SSALR: FAA-E-2628 (Current Edition); 
MALSR: FAA-E-2325 (Current Edition)
Safety
ICAO:
Annex 14 para. 5.3.4.7, 5.3.4.15, 5.3.4.16, 5.3.4.30, and 5.3.4.31
Military:
AFMAN(I) 32-1187/TM 811-5 (UFC 3-535-01) Approach Applications
Installation Introduction
NOTE: Refer to Table 1 for the main differences between the MALSR and ALSF lighting
systems. Refer to “MALSR/ALSF: Required Equipment” on page 8 for details concerning
equipment differences.

The MALSR includes both the electronics for the sequenced flasher and controls for the
steady burning lights. The ALSF per FAA-E-2628 includes only the electronics for the
sequenced flashers.
Table 1:
Main Differences Between MALSR and ALSF
ALSF
MALSR
FAA-E- 2628 specification
FAA-E-2325 specification
Up to 21 Flashers
3, 5 or, 8 Flashers
Flashers only
Flashers and steady burning lights
Misfire monitoring
Misfire monitoring optional
Steady burning lights powered from separate
series circuit
Steady burning light powered from 15 kVA voltage
driven transformer (supplied)
1. ICAO ALSF systems can have up to 30 flashers and can also include a REIL.
ADB’s sequenced-flasher lighting systems include a master control cabinet, junction boxes,
individual control cabinets (ICC), either elevated or in-pavement flasher units and,
maintenance software that can be loaded on a PC running a WindowsTM operating system.
For MALSR systems, a 15kVA transformer is also provided to power the steady-burning
lights.
Parts
2.1.1 Theory of Operation
In the ALSF configuration, an array of light bars are installed symmetrically around the
centerline of the approach lighting system, starting at the approach threshold and extending a
total distance of 2,400 feet (731.5 m) outward into the approach zone up to 3,000 feet (914
m) at facilities where high-speed military aircraft share runway usage. Up to 21 flashing lamp
assemblies (30 for ICAO applications) are installed in the outer portion of the approach
lighting system at regular intervals.
In the MALSR configuration, an array of light bars are installed symmetrically around the
centerline of the approach lighting system, starting at the approach threshold and extending a
total distance of 2,400 feet (731.5 m) into the approach zone and up to 3,000 feet (914.4 m)
at facilities where high-speed military aircraft share runway usage. Typically, up to 8 flashing
lamp assemblies are installed in the outer portion of the approach lighting system at regular
intervals.
The MALSR system uses white 120V AC PAR-38 fixtures for the steady burning light bar
arrays. Also, the MALSR system uses green elevated 120V AC PAR-56 fixtures for the
threshold bar. The ALSF system uses white or red elevated PAR-56 6.6A or 20A fixtures for
light bar arrays and green PAR-56 6.6A or 20A fixtures for the threshold bar.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Disclaimer
The units flash in sequence at 3 selectable brightness levels (3 steps).
Table of
Contents
Sequenced flashing lights are used predominantly during reduced visibility as a landing aid in
the approach area or the runway threshold area.
Operation
2.0 Introduction
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Introduction
3
Schematics
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Compliance with Standards
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Flashing lights are arranged and connected in such a way as to produce a sequenced
flashing light signal that has the appearance of a ball of light traveling down the system from
the outer end (flasher farthest from the runway threshold) to the flasher assembly closest to
the runway threshold twice per second.
2.1.2 ALSF System
See Figure 1. The ALSF system comes in two configurations: ALSF-1 and ALSF-2. Refer to
Table 2 for an overview of ALSF configurations.
Table of
Contents
Table 2:
ALSF Configurations
Safety
ALSF-1
ALSF-2
SSALR
Directs aircraft to runway
centerline under CAT I and
CAT II conditions with
waiver.
Directs aircraft to runway
centerline under CAT I, II, III
conditions.
Directs aircraft to runway centerline when
visibility conditions are better than CAT I.
Up to 15 flashers
Up to 21 flashers
5 flashers. Every other flasher up to #9 is
active; the rest are inactive. Operator can
reconfigure the number of active flashers.
3-Step intensity
3-Step intensity
3-Step intensity
Introduction Installation
The ALSF consists of an array of light bars installed symmetrically about the approach
lighting system centerline, starting at the approach threshold and extending a total distance of
2400 feet (731.52 m) outward into the approach zone and, up to 3000 feet 
(914.4 m) at facilities where high speed military aircraft share runway usage.
NOTE: For steady burning PAR 56 (FAP) used with the ALSF system, refer to instruction
manual 96A0119, Type FAP PAR-56 Approach Light.
Operation
Parts
2.1.2.1 ALSF Uses
ALSF-1, ALSF-2, and ALSF-2/SSALR approach lighting systems with sequenced flashing
lights are used at airports and military air bases to provide landing approach guidance, such
as runway alignment, height perception, horizontal reference, and roll guidance extending
from the landing threshold outward (2,400-3,000 feet) into the approach zone. Note that FAAE-2628 specifies only the sequenced flasher portion of the ALSF approach lighting system.
The steady-burning portion of an ALSF system is implemented using either a 6.6A or 20A
series circuit.
2.1.2.2 ALSF-1
The ALSF-1 approach lighting system is used on Category I Instrument Landing Systems
(ILS) and includes up to 24 light stations (100-foot spacing) with up to 22 centerline bars of
steady-burning lights (five lights to a bar) and up to 15 flashers.
2.1.2.3 ALSF-2
The ALSF-2 approach lighting system is used on Category II runways and includes up to 30
light stations (100-foot spacing) with 30 centerline bars of steady-burning lights (five lights to
a bar) and up to 21 flashers.
Schematics
4
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Compliance with Standards
Disclaimer
ALSF System
2.1.2.4 ALSF-2/SSALR
Schematics
Parts
Operation
Installation Introduction
Safety
Table of
Contents
Figure 1:
The SSALR approach lighting system has up to eight sequenced flashing lights and is used
as part of a dual-mode approach lighting system (ALSF-2/SSALR) when Category I
conditions exist on Category II designated runways.
NOTE: For ICAO applications, the system can also be used with up to 30 flashers with an
additional 2 optional REIL flashers.
2.1.2.5 SSALR Mode
See Figure 1. Refer to Table 2. Both ALSF-1 and ALSF-2 can be operated in the SSALR
mode.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
5
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Compliance with Standards
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
2.1.3 MALSR System
2.1.3.1 MALSR Uses
See Figure 2. The MALSR system is used at airports to provide landing approach guidance
under Category I conditions.
Table of
Contents
The MALSR approach lighting system with sequenced flashing lights are used at airports and
military air bases to provide landing approach guidance, such as runway alignment, height
perception, horizontal reference, and roll guidance extending from the landing threshold
outward (2,400-3,000 feet) into the approach zone. Note that FAA-E-2325 specifies both the
sequenced flasher and steady-burning portions of a MALSR approach lighting system.
Figure 2:
MALSR System
Safety
Introduction Installation
Threshold Lights
(elevated PAR-56 lamp holders or 
in-pavement approach lights

Sequenced Flashing Lights

Medium Intensity Steady Burning
White Lights
Operation
Parts
Schematics
MALSR system includes:
•
•
•
•
A master control cabinet.
•
18 PAR-56 lamp holders used for a threshold marker. Refer to instruction manual
96A0119, Type FAP PAR-56 Approach Light for more information on this fixture.
3-8 sequenced flashers. Five flashers are standard.
15 kVA power transformer.
9 five-light bars installed symmetrically about the approach lighting centerline. Each light
bar has five PAR-38 lamp holders for a total of 45 lampholders.
NOTE: The optional FAA-E-2968 in-pavement approach light can be used as a threshold
marker, depending on site requirements.

The ADB Airfield Solutions MALSR sequenced flasher can be modified to a 21-flasher ALSF
system at a later time.
6
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
•
•
•
•
Humidity: 0 to 100%.
•
Lamp subassembly in elevated flash head can be quickly and easily replaced without the
use of tools.
•
In-pavement flasher uses an aluminum top cover, reducing maintenance requirements.
This also results in a very low weight.
•
•
•
In-pavement flasher height above ground (without snow plow ring) is only 0.75” high.
•
ICC can be optionally supplied with one cabinet that can connect to 3 flashers, minimizing
acquisition and installation cost.
•
ICC uses a highly efficient power supply. This yields lower power consumption,
elimination of peak inrush currents, and allows use of smaller gauge supply power wires
compared to traditional capacitive discharge systems.
•
Numerous remote control/monitoring options maximize system flexibility. Remote
control/monitoring can be accomplished via:
Disclaimer
Temperature Range: -67°F to +137°F 
(-55°C to +55°C)
Altitude: 0 to 10,000 ft. (3048 m) maximum.
MALSR sequenced flashers can be easily expanded to ALSF at a later date.
Flasher operating voltage is +400V DC instead of +2000V DC used in traditional systems,
improving safety. This also allows standard 600V cable to be used between the flasher
and Individual Control Cabinet (ICC). This eliminates the need for high voltage
interconnecting cable.
Safety
2.1.3.3 Features
•
In-pavement flasher height above ground (with snow plow ring) is only 0.5” high.
Flashers can be up to 393 ft. (120 m) from the ICC, allowing placement outside the
obstacle free zone.
— Single or dual field bus.
Schematics
Parts
Operation
— Individual 24V DC, 48V DC or 120V AC hard-wired copper connections.
Installation Introduction
2.1.3.2 Environmental
Operating Conditions
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Compliance with Standards
Table of
Contents
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
7
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Compliance with Standards
Disclaimer
2.1.4 MALSR/ALSF:
Required Equipment
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Refer to Table 3 for the MALSR/ALSF required equipment that is supplied. Refer to
“Additional equipment may be required, and must be ordered separately:” on page 8
for the MALSR and ALSF required equipment that is not supplied. Refer to “Parts” on
page 121 for ordering information.
Table 3:
MALSR/ALSF Required Equipment Supplied
Description
MALSR
ALSF
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
Master Control Cabinet
1
1
Sequence Flasher Heads
3 to 8
Up to 21
Individual Control Cabinets
3 to 8
Up to 21
Junction Boxes
3 to 8
Up to 21
15 kVA Power Transformer
1
None
PAR-38 Lamp Holders
45
None
PAR-56 Lamp Holders
18
None
Flasher Test Equipment
(Laptop and Software)
1
1
Mating Connectors for ICC and the
flasher tester laptop
2
None
Steady-Burning Aiming Device (PAR38/-56)
1
None
Elevated Flasher Aiming Device
1
1
Spare Parts Trunk
1
None
Instruction Manuals
1 set
1 set
NOTE: See ADB catalog sheet 1042 for more details on ALSF or MALSR PAR-56 fixtures.
2.1.5 Additional equipment
may be required, and must
be ordered separately:
Operation
•
•
•
•
•
45-PAR-38, 120W or 150W, 120V AC lamps.
18-PAR-56, 300W, 120V AC lamps.
Frangible couplings.
Low impact-resistant structures.
2-inch (50.8 mm) EMT conduit.
NOTE: New MALSR systems will use the 150 W PAR-38 Lamps.
Parts
Schematics
8
•
For in-pavement FAA-E-2968 MALSR medium-intensity system, Style I, unidirectional
white applications, use part number 44A6439-1000. This fixture uses one 105W lamp and
is photometrically equivalent to the older style 200W L-850B fixtures that were used in this
application. See catalog sheet 2000 for more details.
•
For in-pavement FAA-E-2968 MALSR medium-intensity system, Style II, unidirectional
green applications, use part number 44A6440-1000. This fixture uses three 62W lamps
and is photometrically equivalent to the older style 200W L-850E fixtures that were used
in this application. See catalog sheet 2029 for more details.
•
Encapsulated (FAA Style) isolation transformers are available for voltage-driven,
medium-intensity approach lighting applications. For 105W, 240V AC to 15.9V AC
applications, use part number 35C0095. For three 62W lamp applications, a 186W, 240V
AC to 28.2V AC transformer is used (Part No. 35C0096). See catalog sheet 2000 for
white approach MALSR application.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Description
Binary notation
All data in the digital circuits is treated using “1” and “0”. Thus, all decimal notations
are transcribed into binary notations.
FCU
Flasher Control Unit (ICC)
Hexadecimal
notation
This is a way to write numbers in a base of 16, instead of the standard 10. In the
manual, it is used for bits and addresses, because it better identifies the active data
address or data lines.
ICC
Individual Control Cabinet
LMC
Local Master Controller
Local bus
The communication bus, which exchanges data and control signals between the
FCUs and the LMC.
MW
Multi-wire
PCB
Printed Circuit Board
PE
Protective Earth
UI
User Interface
2.1.7 Master Control
Cabinet
The master control cabinet contains a control / monitoring board, called the Local Master
Controller (LMC), that provides the power, timing signals, misfire monitoring circuitry, and
three-step intensity control signals to the sequenced flasher assemblies in remote and local
mode.
2.1.8 Equipment Data 
(Master Control Cabinet)
Input Voltage 120/240 Vac, +10%/-15%, 
50/60Hz, three-wire, single-phase (neutral center-tapped).
•
Safety
Term
Installation Introduction
2.1.6 Some Useful Terms
and Definitions
Time from:
— In ALSF mode, corresponds to one cycle, Trigger Pulse corresponds to one cycle of
the 60Hz line, or 16.67 ms.
Operation
— In SSALR mode, Trigger Pulse corresponds to every other cycle of the 60Hz line or
33.3 ms.
— For MALSR, corresponds to every other cycle of the 60Hz line or 33.3 ms.
•
•
Disclaimer
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Compliance with Standards
Table of
Contents
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Enclosure NEMA 4, outdoor and ventilated (to prevent condensation).
Maintenance:
— Flasher ON/OFF switch to de-energize flashers (if desired) when the approach lights
are energized.
— LED indicators for system monitoring.
Parts
— Rotary control switch for manual operation.
Schematics
— Service entrance switch disconnects incoming power.
— 100W maintenance light.
— Door can be locked in a 120° open position.
— Lightning Protection on all input and output electrical connections.
2.1.8.1 Gross Weight and
Dimensions
•
•
137 lb. (62 kg)
37.25 x 30 x 11.38 in (94.6 x 76.2 x 28.9 cm) (H x W x L)
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
9
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Compliance with Standards
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
2.1.9 Master Input Power
Requirement
Voltage
Max. No. of Flashers
Max. Power Requirements
ALSF
Max. Power Requirements
MALSR
3
4kVA
18kVA
5kVA
19kVA
5
6
Table of
Contents
8
120/240 Vac
9
6kVA
12
7kVA
15
8kVA
Safety
18
9kVA
21
10kVA
20kVA
2.1.10 Flasher
Introduction Installation
2.1.10.1 Elevated Flash Head
(UEL)
Each elevated flash head assembly consists of a flashing light head, which houses a lowvoltage (400 Vdc) flashtube and a trigger transformer. A safety interlock switch disconnects
the individual control cabinet (ICC) power when the flash head is opened. The elevated flash
head is rated IP45.
2.1.10.2 Type FFL In-pavement
Flasher 
(MALSR and ALSF)
For both MALSR and ALSF, each in-pavement flasher consists of a aluminum fixture, which
houses the low voltage (400 Vdc) linear xenon flashtube, trigger transformer, and optical
assembly. The unique optical assembly ensures that the fixture meets FAA/ICAO
photometric requirements. A safety interlock switch discharges the voltage across the flash
lamp when the fixture is opened for service. A 6-core (5-conductor and shield) cable is used
between the ICC and the in-pavement flasher.
Operation
A 6-core cable pigtail is provided with the fixture. Two methods may be used to connect the 6core cable to the light fixture. The 6-core pigtail can be spliced to the matching 6-core
interconnecting cable using a conventional waterproof splice. Also, a mating connector is
available to allow the entire fixture to be quickly disconnected from the circuit.
In-pavement flasher height is 0.75 inch without the snow plow ring and fits on a standard FAA
12-inch base can. Fixture height is 0.5 inch with the snow plow ring.
Parts
2.1.10.3 In-pavement and
Elevated Flasher Fixture
Equipment Data
Schematics
10
Input Voltage
+400 Vdc
Lamp
Xenon flashtube
Lamp Life
Average 1,000 hours on high-intensity step
Intensity
Decrease
30% or less over minimum rated lamp life
Flash Skipping
Less than 1% with no consecutive skipping
Elevated Light
Beam Axis
Adjustable vertically from the horizontal to 25° above the horizontal
Vibration
Withstands vibration in frequency range of 10 to 2,000Hz in accordance with NEMA
Standard FA1-3.01
Elevated
Mounting
On a 2-inch (5.08 cm) frangible coupling or 2-inch EMT conduit, or 1.5-inch (3.81 cm)
OD tube or 1.5-inch schedule 40 pipe. Mounting can be on a 1-inch (2.54 cm) pipe
(used on an aluminum tower) using adapter sleeve.
Installation
Distance
A maximum of 393 ft. (120 m) from the ICC
Elevated
Dimensions
10.6 x 5.75 x 6.7 in - H x W x D
(27 x 14.6 x 17 cm)
In-pavement
Fits on standard 12-inch base can.
Elevated Wt.
4 lb (1.8 kg).
In-pavement
Weight
16.5 lb. (7.5 kg).
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
2.1.12.1 Elevated PAR-38/56
Steady-Burning Lamps
Aiming devices can be used on either ground mounted lights or when the lights are mounted
on low impact resistant structures conforming to FAA-E-2604 or FAA-E-2702. The aiming
device is used to adjust the vertical elevation angle of PAR-38 and PAR-56 steady-burning
lamp holders. The aiming device permits aiming of the lamp axis perpendicular to the plane of
the cover glass at any angle from 0° to +25° above the horizontal. The aiming angle can be
calibrated in 1° intervals, and the actual aiming angle of the lamp holder with the aiming
device attached is accurate to within ±0.5°.
2.1.12.2 Elevated Type UEL
Flashing Lamps
This aiming device is used to adjust the vertical elevation of the elevated flash head. It is
available either as an electronic or as a simple mechanical (bubble level) based unit. Both
aiming devices have a scale calibrated in 1 degree increments and are accurate to 
within ±0.5°.
The electronic aiming device permits adjustment and measurement of the vertical elevation
angle of the UEL lamp holder for fixtures mounted over 6 ft. (1829 mm) high and, the bubble
level aiming device can be used on fixtures mounted 6 ft. (1829 mm) high or less‘. It is a
single unit consisting of a housing, support, trip cord (on electronic level only) and attaching
parts. The aiming device permits aiming of the lamp axis perpendicular to the plane of the
cover glass to any angle from 0.0 to +25 degrees above the horizontal.
The electronic aiming device can be used to remotely aim the UEL lamp holder on low impact
resistance structures conforming to FAA-E-2604 or FAA-E-2702.
Flasher Tester functionality is accomplished using software (supplied on a CD with the
system) that provides advanced monitoring and on-site configuration capabilities. The
software may be loaded either on a customer supplied laptop or (optionally) on a laptop
provided with the system. The laptop is connected to either the Master or any ICC using a
communication dongle. The software provides user-adjustable parameter setting and
configuration functions and detailed individual status monitoring screens.
2.1.14 Junction Box
Junction boxes are used to distribute power and communications signals to the ICCs. One
junction box is required for each sequenced flasher in the system. Each junction box has two
terminal strips to accommodate all wires used for the flasher unit.
2.1.15 FAA Spare Parts
Trunk
The optional FAA Spare Parts Trunk includes Master, ICC and flashing-fixture PCBs.
Disclaimer
Operation
2.1.13 Flasher Tester
Table of
Contents
2.1.12 Aiming Devices
Safety
Each flasher fixture is controlled by an individual control cabinet, which houses triggering
circuits, terminal blocks, and lightning arrestors. A safety interlock switch is incorporated into
the enclosure to discharge the flash lamp power circuitry when the cabinet door is opened.
The ICC can connect to one flasher or optionally, 3 flashers. The ICC includes an anticondensation heater. As soon as power is applied the anti-condensation heater(s) can
activate, even if the flashing light system is switched off.
Installation Introduction
2.1.11 Individual Control
Cabinet (ICC)
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Compliance with Standards
Schematics
Parts
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
11
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MALSR Steady-Burning Light Components
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
2.2 MALSR SteadyBurning Light
Components
2.2.1 MALSR Lamp
Holders
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
2.2.1.1 PAR-38 Lamp Holder
There are 45 clear PAR-38 lamp holders mounted five to a light bar in the runway approach.
Each lamp holder is designed to accommodate 120W or 150W, 120V AC PAR-38 lamps. An
adjustable base on the lamp holder permits vertical adjustment from the horizontal to 25°
above the horizontal. Also, the mounting hardware permits horizontal alignment of the light
beam axis to any horizontal angle within ±1°. The lamp holder has a mounting base that
mounts on the open top of a frangible coupling, on a light bar with an adapter sleeve, or to a
2-inch (EMT) conduit.
2.2.1.2 PAR-56 Lamp Holder
Eighteen PAR-56 lamp holders are installed on the runway threshold. The lamp holder has
mounting clips to hold the green filter and is designed to accommodate a 300W, 120V AC
PAR-56 lamp. Each lamp holder has an adjustable base for vertical adjustment and mounts
to a 2-inch EMT conduit or on top of a frangible coupling. PAR-56 lamp holders are ordered
separately. See Catalog Sheet 1042 for ordering information.
2.2.2 MALSR 15kVA Power
Transformer
The 15kVA, 60Hz power transformer powers the steady-burning PAR-56 and PAR-38 lights.
Taps on the transformer are switched electronically by the master control cabinet to provide
power at any one of three voltage levels to the steady-burning lights. Additional taps provided
on the primary of the transformer permit manual secondary voltage adjustment to within 2.5%
of the required secondary output assuming the primary voltage is between 210V and 252V
AC. The transformer is housed in an outdoor, rain-tight enclosure with lugs provided on the
back of the enclosure for mounting the cabinet in a vertical position. Two internal MOV
lightning arrestors are provided for input and output lightning protection.
Table 4:
MALSR Power Transformer Nominal Output Voltage
Operation
Intensity Step
Secondary Output
Low
50/100 Vac 0.5%
Medium
75/150 Vac 0.5%
High
120/240 Vac 0.5
Parts
Schematics
12
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Individual Control Cabinets
3 to 8
Junction Boxes
1
15 kVA Power Transformer
45
PAR-38 Lamp Holders
18
PAR-56 Lamp Holders
1
Flasher Tester Equipment
1
Steady-Burning Aiming Device (PAR-38/-56)
1
Elevated Flasher Aiming Device
1
Spare Parts Trunk
1
Instruction Manual
Safety
Sequence Flasher Heads
3 to 8
Table of
Contents
Master Control Cabinet
3 to 8
Additional equipment may be required, but must be ordered separately:
•
•
•
•
•
PAR-38, 120W or 150W, 120V AC lamps
•
Encapsulated (FAA Style) isolation transformers are available for voltage-driven,
medium-intensity approach lighting applications. For 105W, 240V AC to 15.9V AC
applications, use part number 35C0095.
•
For in-pavement FAA-E-2968 MALSR medium-intensity system, Style II, unidirectional
green applications, use part number 44A6440-1000. This fixture uses three 62W lamps
and is photometrically equivalent to the older style 200W L-850E fixtures that were used
in this application. See catalog sheet 2029 for more details.
•
Encapsulated (FAA Style) isolation transformers are available for voltage-driven,
medium-intensity approach lighting applications. For three 62W lamp applications, a
186W, 240V AC to 28.2V AC transformer is used (Part No. 35C0096). See catalog sheet
2000 for white approach MALSR application.
PAR-56, 300W, 120V AC lamps
Frangible couplings
Low impact-resistant structures
For in-pavement FAA-E-2968 MALSR medium-intensity system, Style I, unidirectional
white applications, use part number 44A6439-1000. 
This fixture uses one 105W lamp and is photometrically equivalent to the older style
200W L-850B fixtures that were used in this application. See catalog sheet 2000 for more
details.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
13
Installation Introduction
1
Description
Operation
Quantity
Disclaimer
The following equipment is supplied for the MALSR approach lighting systems per 
FAA-E-2325:
Parts
2.3 MALSR Ordering
Information
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MALSR Ordering Information
Schematics
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ALSF Ordering Information
Disclaimer
2.4 ALSF Ordering
Information
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
The following equipment is supplied for the ALSF-1, ALSF-2, and ALSF-2/SSALR approach
lighting systems per FAA-E-2628:
Quantity
1
Description
Master Control Cabinet (up to 32 for ICAO applications)
Table of
Contents
Up to 21
Flashing Light Heads (up to 32 for ICAO applications)
Up to 21
Individual Control Cabinets (up to 32 for ICAO applications)
Up to 21
Junction Boxes
Safety
1
Steady-Burning Aiming Device
1
Elevated Flasher Aiming Device
1
Flasher Tester Equipment
1
Instruction Manual
Additional equipment may be required, but must be ordered separately:
Introduction Installation
•
•
•
•
•
•
PAR-56 Lamp Holder Assemblies
PAR-56 Lamps
Frangible Couplings
Low Impact-Resistant Structures
Spare Parts Trunk
L-830 Isolation Transformer or
(1) 1,500W, 20A/20A, Isolation Transformer
NOTE: For in-pavement FAA-E-2952 (Replacement for 2491) ALSF high-intensity system
applications, see Catalog Sheet 2029 for details.
Operation
Parts
Schematics
14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Specifications
2.5.1 Commissioning
Records
Disclaimer
2.5 Specifications
This table may be used to record the configuration of the system.
APPROACH
Mode name
Control unit ID
Flasher ID
Control unit 1
Flasher A
SW2
Timing in ms
REIL
Table of
Contents
Cycle time in seconds
Group
Flasher B
Flasher C
Flasher A
Safety
Control unit 2
Flasher B
Flasher C
Control unit 3
Flasher A
Installation Introduction
Flasher B
Flasher C
Control unit 4
Flasher A
Flasher B
Flasher C
Control unit 5
Flasher A
Flasher B
Flasher C
Control unit 6
Flasher A
Flasher B
Control unit 7
Operation
Flasher C
Flasher A
Flasher B
Flasher C
Control unit 8
Flasher A
Flasher B
Parts
Flasher C
Control unit 9
Flasher A
Flasher B
Flasher C
Flasher A
Schematics
Control unit 10
Flasher B
Flasher C
Control unit 11
Control unit 12
Control unit 13
Control unit 14
Control unit 15
Control unit 16
Control unit 17
Control unit 18
Control unit 19
Control unit 20
Control unit 21
Control unit 22
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
15
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Specifications
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Control unit ID
Flasher ID
SW2
Timing in ms
REIL
Group
Control unit 23
Control unit 24
Control unit 25
Control unit 26
Table of
Contents
Control unit 27
Control unit 28
Control unit 29
Control unit 30
Control unit 31
Control unit 32
Safety
2.5.2 Default Settings
Multi-wire
Table 5:
P1
Back-indication signals Multi-wire
Function
Introduction Installation
1
SFL running - contact closed when running
2
RTILS/REILS running - contact closed when running
3
REILS DOWN - contact closed in case of alarm
4
Misfire on 1 ICC (latched) - contact closed in case of alarm
5
Misfire on 2 consecutive ICCs (latched) - contact closed in case of alarm
6
Communication error on local bus + Security (Door + MOV) – contact open in case of
alarm
7
Overtemperature – contact closed in case of alarm
8
Alarms 3 + 5 + 6 combined in OR mode – contact closed in case of alarm
Operation
9
Common
10
GNDext
11
Vext+
12
PE
The above settings can be modified at any time, by using the Flasher Tester Software. It is
the customer’s responsibility to modify the configuration. Modification of the Multi-wire
configuration is only possible using the Flasher Tester Software.
Parts
Table 6:
Remote control signals Multi-wire
Schematics
P2
Function
1
SFL ON Step 1
2
SFL ON Step 2
3
SFL ON Step 3
4
REILS/RTILS ON step 1
5
REILS/RTILS ON step 2
6
REILS/RTILS ON step 3
7
Reset alarms
8
Reserved for future use
9
Common
10
Vext+
11
GNDext
12
PE
The above settings can be modified at any time, by using the Flasher Tester Software. It is
the customer’s responsibility to modify the configuration. Modification of the Multi-wire
configuration is only possible using the Flasher Tester Software.
16
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
The following table can be used to record the Back-indication signals
Table 7:
Disclaimer
2.5.3 Customized Settings
Multi-wire
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Specifications
Back-indication signals
P1
Function
1
Table of
Contents
2
3
4
5
6
7
Common
10
GNDext
11
Vext+
12
PE
Installation Introduction
9
Safety
8
The following table can be used to record the Remote control signals
Table 8:
P2
Remote control signals
Function
1
2
3
4
Operation
5
6
7
8
Common
GNDext
12
PE
Schematics
Vext+
11
Parts
9
10
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
17
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Technical Data
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
2.6 Technical Data
The flashing light system meets ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization) and FAA
(Federal Aviation Administration) requirements, as well as those of the IEC 61824 and IEC
61000-6-4 and 61000-6-2 standards of the International Electro-technical Commission.
2.6.1 Operational Limits
The flashing light units are designed for outdoor use in the airport approach area.
Table of
Contents
They are designed to meet the requirements of the various specifications mentioned above.
Operation outside the design limitations of these specifications may result in degradation of
performance, damage or failure of components or hazardous conditions.
Safety
2.6.1.1 Temperature range
The equipment is designed for an operation at an ambient temperature from -50° C up to
+55° C (-67° F to +137° F).
2.6.1.2 Humidity range
The PCBs inside the light unit are tropicalized to resist humidity conditions up to 95% without
condensation.
2.6.1.3 Input voltage range
The system is designed to operate on 240/120 Vac. The absolute minimum and maximum
limits for the power supply are 190 V up to 260 Vac.
Introduction Installation
For cable sizing a minimum voltage of 190V phase to phase should be considered to permit
10% voltage fluctuations of the power supply source.
2.6.1.4 Rated frequency
50/60 Hz (± 5%).
2.6.1.5 Power consumption
The maximum line current per cabinet at 2 flashes/s and maximum brightness step will be
1.5A.
Table 9:
Operation
2.6.1.6 Multi-wire Control
signals
Remote control and monitoring
Control
Back-indications monitoring
Multi-wire 24 Vdc
MW free contacts (24 Vdc)
Multi-wire 48 Vdc
MW free contacts (48 Vdc)
The control signals (any polarity permitted) feed relay coils protected by an RC circuit for
transient over-voltage.
Multi-wire:
48 Vdc remote
control
24 Vdc remote
control
Minimum voltage
40 Vdc
21.6 Vdc
Parts
Maximum voltage
65 Vdc
35 Vdc
Current consumption
about 9 mA at
48 Vdc
about 16 mA at
24 Vdc
Schematics
Multi-wire back-indication signals.
The back-indication signals are provided over dry contact relays.
The maximum contact load is:
•
•
AC-110 V-0.5 A-60 VA
DC-110 V-0.5 A-30 W
Multi-wire, internal power supply
The Multi-wire has a small power supply on board, floating towards ground level and shortcircuit protected by self-repairing polyswitches. The maximum current is 200 mA for 48 Vdc
and 400 mA for 24 Vdc.
This source is useable to control the system with contact signals and to deliver at the same
time voltage feedback signals. Notice that the output voltage of this power supply is fully
depending on the input voltage. Thus take the maximum input voltage drop into account for
cable sizing of the control signal cable.
NOTE: For FAA ALSF and MALSR applications, 120 Vac relays interface to a 24 Vdc
(48Vdc) multiwire board.
18
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
2.6.1.7 EMC conformity
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Technical Data
According to EN61000-6-4 (Generic standard, Industrial environment, Emission), para. 7.1,
the flashing light system will not be used in residential, commercial and light-industrial
environment.
2.6.2 Mechanical Data
Outer dimensions
(WxDxH):
16.5 x 9.25 x 20.5-inches
(420 x 235 x 520 mm)
(without mounting kit)
Total weight:
42.7 lbs. (19.4 kg)
Table 11:
Table of
Contents
ICC-1 :Dimentions and Weight
ICC-3: Dimentions and Weight
31 x 13.3 x 25.6-inches
(790 x 340 x 650 mm)
(sun roof & base included)
Total weight:
103.6 lbs. (47 kg)
Schematics
Parts
Operation
Outer dimensions
(WxDxH):
Safety
Table 10:
Installation Introduction
2.6.2.1 Individual Control
Cabinet
Disclaimer
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
19
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ADB ALSF / MALSR System Specifications
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
2.7 ADB ALSF /
MALSR System
Specifications
This subsection describes the specifications for the MALSR and ALSF. Refer to the Parts
section for part numbers.
2.7.1 Master Control
Cabinet
This subsection describes the specifications for the master control cabinet.
Table of
Contents
2.7.1.1 Maintenance Features
on Control Cabinet
Safety
Introduction Installation
2.7.2 Aiming Device
Operation
Parts
2.7.3 Junction Box
Table 12:
Time from Trigger Pulse to Trigger Pulse
MALSR
ALSF
SSALR
Corresponds to every other cycle
of the 60 Hz line (33.33 ms)
Corresponds to one cycle of 60
Hz line (16.67 ms)
Corresponds to every other cycle
of the 60 Hz line (33.33 ms)
Refer to the list below for the MALSR/ALSF approach lighting systems control cabinet
maintenance features.
•
•
Rotary control switch for manual control of brightness level of system.
•
•
Service entrance switch disconnects incoming power to the control unit.
•
Door can be locked in a 120 degree position.
Flasher on/off switch to de-energize flashers, if desired, when the approach lights are
energized.
Maintenance light (100 W, 120 Vac); 120 Vac, single phase, 15 A, grounding-type
receptacle with built-in fault interrupter.
Enclosure
NEMA-4, Enclosure is outdoor and ventilated to prevent condensation.
Mounting
Mounting lugs provided on the back of the cabinet for mounting the cabinet
vertically.
Dimensions
37-1/4 x 30 x 13-3/8 inches (94.6 x 76.2 x 34 cm)
Total Weight
137 lb (62.14 kg)
This subsection describes the specifications for the PAR38 / PAR56 aiming device.
Quantity
One
Aiming
Flash lamp axis can be aimed from 0 to 25 degrees above the horizontal.
Scale
Calibrated in 1-degree increments
Accuracy
1/2 degree
Dimensions
7 in. x 10 in. (17.8 cm x 25.4 cm) diameter
Weight
10 lb (4.5 kg)
This subsection describes the specifications for the junction box.
One junction box for each flasher.
Junction boxes are made to FAA drawing D-5140-2 except for the following:
Schematics
1-in. conduit hub is replaced by two 2-in. conduit hubs at the bottom of the box.
Quantity
Terminal blocks are of the enclosed-base type for use with pressure-type terminals
meeting the requirements of FAA-G-2100c, paragraph 3.5.34.
Boxes provide control- and monitor-wire interconnection between master control
cabinet and individual control cabinets.
2.7.4 PAR-38 Lampholders
(MALSR Only)
20
Conduit Hubs
Two 2-in. hubs on the bottom of the box
Dimensions
14 x 14 x 6 in. (35.6 x 35.6 x 15.2 cm)
Weight
15 lb (6.8 kg)
This subsection describes the specifications for the MALSR PAR-38 lampholders.
Design
The PAR-38 lampholders are designed to accommodate 120W or 150W,
120 Vac, PAR-38 spot lamps.
Quantity
Total of 45 lampholders
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Mounts on a 2-inch EMT conduit, to the top of a frangible coupling or with
adapter sleeve, on an aluminum or fiberglass tower.
Dimensions
9 x 3 x 3 in. (22.9 x 7.6 x 7.6 cm)
This subsection describes the specifications for the MALSR PAR-56 lampholders.
Design
Quantity
Total of 18 lampholders
Mounting
Mounts on a 2-inch EMT conduit, to the top of a frangible coupling or with
adapter sleeve on an aluminum or fiberglass tower.
Dimensions
13-1/3 x 6-1/4 x 8-5/16 in. (33.86 x 15.88 x 21.11 cm)
This subsection describes the specifications for the MALSR 15 kVA power transformer. This
transformer provides power and intensity control to the steady burning PAR-38 and PAR-56
lamps.
Rating
15kVA
Input
210-252 Vac, 60 Hz
Output
120/240 Vac
Taps
Taps are provided on the primary to permit adjustment of secondary voltages.
Output Voltage
Refer to Table 4 for output voltage. Table 4 applies only when output voltage
is connected to 240 Vac primary input.
Lightning Protection
Two internal lightning arrestors are provided on the transformer’s input and
output power lines.
Dimensions
18 x 13.25 x 12 in. (45.7 x 33.7 x 30.48 cm) (L x H x W)
Weight
262 lb (119 kg)
Schematics
Parts
2.7.6 15 kVA Power
Transformer (MALSR
Only)
The PAR-56 lampholders are designed to accommodate 200 W, 300 W, 500
W 6.6 A, 20 A, or 120 Vac depending upon application.
Disclaimer
Mounting
Table of
Contents
5 PAR-38 lampholders are installed on a light bar. Nine light bars are in a
system.
Safety
Installation
Installation Introduction
2.7.5 PAR-56 Lampholders 
(MALSR and ALSF)
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ADB ALSF / MALSR System Specifications
Operation
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
21
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ADB ALSF / MALSR System Specifications
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
Operation
Parts
Schematics
22
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Read installation instructions in their entirety before starting installation.
DANGER
•
•
•
•
Only qualified personnel may install or repair electrical equipment in accordance with NFPA 70B,
Electrical Equipment Maintenance and NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces.
Disconnect and tag out the sources supplying electrical power to this device before making or repairing
connections to this device in accordance with airport lockout and tagout procedures.
Use approved testing equipment to test that the circuit is de-energized.
All applicable regulations in accordance with local codes and FAA standards must be followed.
When working on or carrying out measurements on the device, the following basic rules must
be followed:
CAUTION:
•
•
•
•
•
The device must be disconnected from the main power supply (isolated).
The device must be secured against being accidentally switched on.
Disconnection must be measured or checked.
The ICC housing must not be opened until all electrical supply cables have been disconnected for at
least 1 minute.
Only potential-free instruments may be used for measurements on components.
WARNING
•
Components may carry hazardous or deadly voltages even after being switched off.
WARNING
ESD susceptible devices (ESDS): Components susceptible to damage by electrostatic
discharges.
The component assemblies contain components that are susceptible to electrostatic
discharges. 
These components can be very easily destroyed if not handled properly. 
However, if it is necessary to work on electronic assemblies, follow the instructions below:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Schematics
•
Electronic assemblies should only be touched if working on them is absolutely necessary.
If assemblies have to be touched, use a static discharge strap.
Connection pins and printed circuit conductors must not be touched. Assemblies must only be held by
the edge.
Assemblies may not be brought into contact with highly insulating materials – e.g. plastic parts,
insulating table tops, or clothing made of artificial fibers.
Assemblies may only be placed on conductive surfaces.
Assemblies and components must only be stored or dispatched in conductive packaging (such as
metallic or metallized plastic containers).
If the packaging itself is not conductive, assemblies must be wrapped in a conductive material before
packing.
Safety
•
Installation Introduction
Installation
of the System
WARNING
Table of
Contents
Disclaimer
Safety Instructions
Operation
3.0 Installation of
the System
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Installation of the System
Parts
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
23
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Overview
Disclaimer
3.1 Overview
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
This section provides instructions for the installation of the flashing system.
Refer to the project drawings and specifications for specific installation details.
All references in this chapter refer to the drawings at the end of this manual, 
see “Schematics” on page 131.
Table of
Contents
3.1.1 Preparation of the
Flashing Equipment
3.1.1.1 Action 1: Unpacking
Unpack the crates upon receipt and examine the units to insure that no damage has occurred
during shipping.
NOTE: Inspect crates visually upon receipt to detect any possible damage to the equipment
prior to unpacking.
Safety
If damage is detected to packaging or equipment, probably caused by transport, please
immediately make a claim to the shipper. If required, prepare necessary evidence and fill out
a claim form from the shipper.
Introduction Installation
Overview
3.1.1.2 Action 2: Identification of
the ICC cabinets
Identify clearly the cabinets according to their physical location. Flasher #1 is always the
flasher farthest from the runway.
You can keep a record of the data by filling in the table in “Commissioning Records” on
page 15 of this manual.
3.1.1.3 Action 3: Identification of
the MCC
•
•
The MCC may be installed anywhere along the line of the flashing lights.
•
The Local Master Control PCB in the MCC will need to be configured on site for the
required configuration. See “Operation” on page 53, for more information.
•
The Master Control Cabinet (part number: “Parts” on page 121) contains the necessary
hardware to connect to:
Only one MCC is required for one sequenced flashing system and includes RTILS/REILS,
if present.
Operation
— The Individual Control Cabinets, ICC-1 or ICC-3.
— All the required remote control interfacing circuitry (the Multi-wire connection board).
— The external temperature probe.
3.1.1.4 Action 4: Prepare circuit
boards
Although holes are present in the EMC covers, it will not always be possible to access all the
Dip-switches and/or jumpers if the covers are installed. 
(This is the case for the side mounted PCBs in the ICC -3).
Parts
Remove the EMC protection plate from the ICC PCB, if necessary. Be sure to replace EMC
covers after configuration.
For safety reasons, turn power OFF at the Master and open the ICC incoming AC power
supply fuse link(s) (on the DIN rail next to the power supply terminals).
Schematics
Table 13:
Name
TB2
•
24
Connections, cable terminals
Type
Purpose
6-pin PHOENIX
Lamp connection to ICC
(10.16 mm)
External wiring
x
Remarks
Connect the shielding of the
cable to the chassis of the
cabinet
Apart from the cabling between UEL or FFL (lamp units) and ICC (flasher control units),
the power supply cabling and Local Bus interconnection, the ICC cabinets are pre-wired
in the factory.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Overview
Disclaimer
TB2 Connector
•
Removal of the jumpers
For installations where the MCC is physically installed at the end of the flashers, jumpers
W11, W25 and W28 must be removed on all the ICC units EXCEPT on the last ICC on the
local bus communication line that is farthest from the MCC. Make sure that the external “local
bus” data line, in the first and last cabinet are respectively connected to P3 & P1 on PCB
1498. The drawing in “Schematics” on page 131 can make this clear.
This is necessary to properly terminate the local bus communication line to insure proper
communication between all ICCs and the MCC.
Figure 4:
SW1
FCU PCB 1487: Switchbanks and Jumpers
SW2
Parts
Operation
Jumper W11
Installation Introduction
Overview
Safety
Table of
Contents
Figure 3:
Jumper W25
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Schematics
Jumper W28
25
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Overview
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
3.1.2 Preparation for
Installation
3.1.2.1 Concrete slabs
Table of
Contents
•
Location
The ICC Cabinets may be installed either close to the flashing lights they control or at a
remote location up to 393 Feet (120 m) away, provided the cross-section of the cable
from ICC to lighting fixture allows for the total distance between the two, including mast
height if any. Mount ICC’s on frangible couplings (separately supplied) if within the safety
area. Refer to the site drawings for cable sections and distances.
•
The Concrete Slabs
The preferred method of installation for the ICC cabinets is on concrete foundations
protruding slightly above the surrounding ground level. Protrusion should be limited to the
minimum compatible with a possible flooding of the surrounding terrain.
The concrete is cast so that the foundation rests on firm soil, below the frost line.
Safety
Figure 5:
ICC Dimensions concrete slab
Dimensions in inch (mm)
UEL Elevated Flasher
Introduction Installation
Overview
If connected to FFL,
orient the fixture to
aim this direction.
ICC
ICC (3 in 1 shown)
Junction Box
1.0 (25)
Operation
6.3 (160)
Parts
20.7 (525)
24.0 (610)
Temp Sensor
Schematics
Main Supply
21.6 (550)
In-pavement Type FFL or
Elevated Type UEL lights
one for ICC-1 and three
for ICC-3 cabinets
Local Bus
Usable Surface for Conduit
15.75 x 7.9 (400 x 200)
Figure 5 shows dimensions that are generally acceptable but can be modified to suit local
conditions e.g. soil strength characteristics or other local characteristics.
26
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
A sufficient number of pipes/ducts for the different cables needed.
The quantity of cables depends on the system design. See table below.
Mains supply
IN/OUT
Local bus
IN/OUT
to receive two
cables
ICC -1
4
X
X
X
/
/
ICC -3
6
X
X
X
X
X
UNIT
N° 1
N° 2
N°3
Install the anchor bolts securing the ICC cabinet, into the concrete. These may be
installed before the concrete has cured, or holes can be drilled for installing the anchor
bolts afterwards.
Schematics
Parts
Operation
Installation Introduction
Overview
•
LIGHTING FIXTURES
Number of
cables
Table of
Contents
•
Disclaimer
In the concrete mounting block, the contractor must provide:
Safety
3.1.3 Contractor
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Overview
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
27
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Physical Installation
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
3.2 Physical
Installation
Table of
Contents
3.2.1 Mechanical Mounting
and Electrical
Connections
The individual control cabinets should be installed outside the safety area. If installed inside,
the installation needs to be frangible. In order to limit the effects of the jet blast, it is
recommended to install the cabinets with their largest vertical surface parallel to the approach
axis.
3.2.1.1 Unpacking the
Equipment
Handle equipment very carefully to prevent component damage. Note any exterior damage to
the carton/crate that might lead to detection of equipment damage. Open the top of the
carton/crate. Remove foam packing from the top of the box.
Safety
Unpack the carton/crate upon receipt and check the contents and their condition. If you note
any damage to any equipment, file a claim with the carrier immediately. The carrier may need
to inspect the equipment.
The installation shall conform to the applicable sections of the National Electric Code and
local codes.
Introduction Installation
Physical Installation
3.2.2 Installing Master
Control Cabinet
To install the master control cabinet, follow the guidelines below. See Figure 6. Refer to
Table 14. Refer to the site drawings for specific installation details.
Figure 6:
Master Control Cabinet Installation and Dimensions
3.0 (76)
(340)
Dimensions in
inches (mm)
(11)
Contractor-Supplied Steel
Structure
Operation
Contractor-Supplied 2-Inch
(50 mm ) EMT or 2-Inch 
(50 mm) Thread Conduit
6.0 (152)
24.0 in (610)
6.0 (152)
Parts
(76)
49.0 min (1245)
Side
View
Front View
Schematics
Table 14:
28
36.0 (914)
MALSR/ALSF Master Control Cabinet Dimensions
System
A
in. (mm)
B
in. (mm)
C
in. (mm)
D
in. (mm)
MALSR/ALSF
36 (91)
30 (76)
24 (61)
37 (95)
•
Mount the master control cabinet vertically through the external mounting lugs provided
on the back of the cabinet.
•
•
Drill conduit holes in the cabinet as required at the time of installation.
•
When the master cabinet is mounted out on the field, provide a concrete pad and
fabricate and secure a steel framework in the concrete pad to mount the master control
cabinet and other equipment as specified in site drawings. Concrete pad size and
structure size is to be determined by the contractor and applicable local specifications.
When the master cabinet is mounted inside a vault, secure the cabinet to the wall by
using bolts and bolt anchors or as specified by site installation drawings.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
3.2.3 Installing the
Individual Control
Cabinets
To install the individual control cabinet, follow the guidelines below.
3.2.4 Mounting Junction
Box
To mount the junction box, follow the guidelines below.
•
•
Refer to site drawings for location and mounting provisions.
•
Mount the junction box on frangible couplings (separately supplied).
Disclaimer
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Physical Installation
Locate the junction box next to the individual control cabinet. This is the preferred method
of installation.
NOTE: The junction box is supplied with two 2-in. (50.8-mm) conduit hubs for mounting and
wiring.
After the concrete slabs are cured, the control units may be installed and secured with anchor
bolts (see the drawings).
NOTE: BEWARE: Make sure you have the correct physical numbering of the control units 
(see your physical layout).

After installation, apply a watertight silicone seal between the control unit base and the
concrete and fill the duct openings with insulating expansion foam.
Schematics
Parts
The ICC may be installed as shown in the pictures below or, on a mounting pole using an
optional mounting kit (1440.20.200). The pole must be installed on a concrete slab. Use the
junction box to connect the power supply cables and distribute the phases over the different
ICCs, especially in the case of using a three-phase power supply. The control, supply and
lamp (UEL or FFL) cables can enter into the cabinet through a bottom plate that can be fitted
in the bottom of the cabinet. The ordering code for the replacement bottom plate is
4072.01.530. The cables must enter the cabinet through watertight connectors in order to
limit the ingress of vermin, insects and water.
Safety
Install the ICC as in the drawings below:
Installation Introduction
Physical Installation
3.2.5 Installation of ICC 1
or ICC 3
See Figure 5 for recommended installation and dimensions.
Operation
•
Table of
Contents
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
29
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Physical Installation
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Figure 7:
Dimensions and sequence of mounting on a slab using anchor bolts
(dimensions in mm)
6.3
160
(160)
Details of ICC mounting.
624.0
10
(610)
Table of
Contents
3-4
(80100)
Safety
6.3
(160)
Introduction Installation
Physical Installation
Dimensions in
inch (mm)
Install the anchor bolts so that they protrude above
the concrete by 80 to 100 mm.
NOTE: For the installation shown, the ICC
must be mounted outside the safety area.
Operation
29.5
(750)
750
Dimensions in
inch (mm)
24.0
(610)
610
2.0
(50)
50
15.75
(400)
400
160
8.0
(200)
200
Parts
6.3
(160)
Schematics
More details on cabling for the ICC can be found in the drawings at the end of this manual.
30
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Physical Installation
ICC-1: Example of a Pole Mounted ICC
Figure 9:
Typical Cable Entry Detail
Schematics
Parts
Operation
Installation Introduction
Physical Installation
Safety
Table of
Contents
Figure 8:
Disclaimer
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
31
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Electrical Connections
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
3.3 Electrical
Connections
Make sure that the cable selection and cable entry details are correct.
3.3.1 Power Supply Cable
Keep in mind that the system is designed so that power is permanently connected to the ICC
Cabinet.
Terminals:
Table of
Contents
— The terminals (screw type) accept wire cross-sections ranging from 1.5 up to 16 mm²
(16 - 6 AWG).
— Insulation stripping length: 1/2-inch (12mm). Clamping screw: M4. Screwdriver blade:
5.5 x 1.0. Tightening torque range: 0.9 to 1.8 ft-lb (1.2 to 2.4 N•m).
In the ICC-3: double terminals are present for the three phases, the neutral and Earth ground
connection.
Safety
In the ICC-1: single terminals are present for each of the single-phase 240 Vac wires. Double
terminals are present for the Earth ground connection.
•
Introduction Installation
Electrical
Connections
3.3.2 Local Bus Data Line
Interlinking Cables
An external junction box is required for each ICC.
Remember:
•
•
To use 18 AWG, Triad, Shielded, 600 V cable. Manhattan Wire M8628010 or equivalent.
To connect the bus cable to P3 terminal on the local bus interface PCB of the first cabinet
and to P1 on the last cabinet in the LOCAL Bus communication line.
Terminals:
P1 and P3: WAGO 231-303/026-000 cage-clamp connectors type for wires of 0.08 to 2.5
mm² (28–12 AWG). Connector spring activation is possible with screwdriver blade 3.5 x
0.5mm or with operating lever WAGO 231-131.
Recommended stripping length: 6 mm (1/4 in).
Operation
3.3.2.1 Connection
•
The use of a proper cable for Bus+ and Bus– and a zero volt connection wire is
imperative. 
During installation, care must be taken that the bus polarity remains the same in all the
ICC cabinets.
NOTE: If the polarity is inverted on a control unit this will not cause damage, but the flashers
in the control unit will not respond to the commands of the MCC.
Parts
Schematics
32
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Cable between the flashing light and the ICC PCB (5-core cable with armor (shield) - 
up to 393 feet (120 m) max). The recommended cable is Alpha 65405CY-SL or an
equivalent, ADB part number 89A0290-5.
Terminals:
— The lamp cable is connected to each ICC PCB and to its respective flashing light by
means of the green TB2 connector (for conductors 0.5 up to 6 mm²; 20 – 7 AWG).
— Insulation stripping length: 9 mm (1/3-in). Clamping screw: M4. Screwdriver blade: 4.0
x 1.0. Tightening torque range: 0.9 to 1.8 ft-lb (1.2 to 2.4 N•m).
Trigger: Lamp cathode
Disclaimer
3.3.2.2 Cable
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Electrical Connections
Table of
Contents
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
+400V: Lamp anode
Safety
PE: Protective earth
Cab +: Flash lamp interlock switch
Cab –: Flash lamp interlock switch
Figure 10:
Installation Introduction
Electrical
Connections
The shield is connected only at the ICC.
Connections:
Trigger
+ 400V
PE
Operation
CAB +
CAB -
NOTE: The terminals for both elevated and inset flashing lights are different. Check the
details in the wiring diagrams in “Schematics” on page 131.
3.3.2.3 Remote control
connections
Individual wires are always used for remote control commands and back-indications.
These are connected to the multi-wire board via the terminal blocks in the bottom of the MCC.
Terminals:
— The terminal blocks in the bottom of the MCC are cage-clamp connectors for wires
from 0.08 to 2.5 mm² (28 – 12 AWG). Recommended stripping length: 6 mm (1/4-in).
Connection:
The function of each input terminal is determined in the software. Configuration of this
terminal block has to be known to make the right connections.
3.3.2.4 External temperature
sensor cable
This can be connected to any ICC. One sensor only is required per complete flashing system.
3.3.2.5 Earth to ground
connection
Earth to ground connection should be executed in accordance with applicable local
regulations:
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
33
Schematics
Parts
Spare
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Electrical Connections
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Recommendations and accessories:
•
For strain relief and grounding of the cable armor (shield) there is a cable clamp usable
for different cable diameters mountable on the grounded rail at the bottom of the ICC (Use
one cable clamp per cable).
Figure 11:
Cable clamp
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
Electrical
Connections
•
Earth connection of the unit has to be done with an individual grounding rod (by
preference interconnected with the other cabinets) or with a grounding wire (Check local
legislation for installation requirements and required cross-section).
Installation of the cables shall be in ducts, in pipes or directly buried in the ground.
3.3.3 Cabling
Preconditions
All cables enter the ICC cabinets through the bottom.
•
•
ICC -1 via glands through the gland plate,
ICC -3 via ducts in the concrete
Please check compliance with local requirements and regulations.
Operation
In any case, please ensure you have provided:
•
•
•
Sufficient mechanical protection of the cables
An adequate Earth to ground connection of the ICC cabinets
An adequate Earth to ground connection of the cable armor
Recommended types of cable
Parts
Function
Type
Schematics
120/240 Vac, 3/C
Power supply cable
Three-phase
Power distribution
cable
Number of
conductors
Required
section/diameter
3 conductors,
neutral center
Depends on the
tapped connection length and the
5 (3 Ph+N+ Earth system layout 
(see Figure 12)
to ground
connection
Alpha cable part #
65405CY-SL
Cable between the
cabinet and fixture
5 + shield
34
Individual wires
rated 600V
Cable should be rated for 600V.
To ease disconnection, we recommend the use of a flexible
cable.
We recommend a PVC covered, flexible metallic conduit
(cable with armor or shield).
WIRE CROSS-SECTION / MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH
Depends on length •
•
(see remarks)
•
•
LAPP Cable Öllflex
Classic 100CY
Multi-wire control
cable between
master and
substation or tower
Comments
(number of signals
# 18 (0.8mm²)
+ 1 common wire)
# 16, (1.5 mm²) / 98’- 5” (30 m)
# 12, (2.5 mm²) / 164’ - 5” (50 m)
# 10, (4 mm²) / 262’ - 5” (80 m)
# 8, (6 mm²) / 393’ - 8” (120 m)
The factor (number of signals + return(s)) depends on the
remote control system design:
•
Combining the remote control and back-indication signals in 1
cable is only possible if there is no (or only low level) crosstalk
risk between these signals (as is the case with one common DC
energy source for remote control and back-indication signals).
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Electrical Connections
Disclaimer
Proper power cable sizing, to fit the actual field particulars, is possible using the ADB
calculation tool “power cable work file selection sheet.xls” as shown below:
This “cable calculation program” is available from ADB upon request.
Example for an ALSF-2, 21-fixture configuration:
Choosen section of home run cable
Table of
Contents
Standard configuration
Runway width Home run cable length
Custom system
Minimumsection required for home run cable
mm²
Common information
Nominal voltage on Power supply between L & N
Type of power sypply
Power supply on Box N° ?
230V
Minimumsection required
Price for cable
Runway side
Lead-in side
07
25
31
#N/A flashers
#N/A m
#N/A mm²
#N/A
Installation Introduction
Electrical
Connections
Cable length
Safety
System overview
Nr of flashers
#N/A flashers
Cable length
#N/A m
Minimumsection required
#N/A mm²
Price for cable
#N/A
Nr of flashers
1
30
32
Power supply on box N°
#N/A
Home run cable
Total number of flashers in system
Home run cable length
Total cable length flasher
Total cost of cable
Price for home run cable
Nr of flashers
flashers
#N/A m
#N/A
Custom approach
With / Without RTILS
Cable length between flashers
Cable length between flashers and RTILS
Runway width
M
Additional information
Cable cost information
2.5 mm²
16 mm²
4 mm²
25 mm²
6 mm²
35 mm²
10 mm²
Currency
M
M
M
The input power supply point is at the 21st fixture (nearest to the threshold) with a distance to
the substation of 2953 ft. (900 m) (home run) and a nominal source voltage between L and N
of 240 Vac from a 3 phases +N network.
Results given by the “power cable work sheet file” are:
Cross-section of
cable home run
Cross-section of cable
between the units
Three-phase
6 mm²
6mm²
Single-phase
10 mm²
10mm²
Comments
Parts
Supply
Lamp cable:
This should be a shielded cable with five conductors. There is no need for a high voltage
cable.
See “Schematics” on page 131 for color coding.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Operation
Type of approach
35
Schematics
Figure 12:
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Electrical Connections
Disclaimer
3.3.4 Mounting Power
Transformer (MALSR
Only)
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
To mount the MALSR power transformer, follow the guidelines below. Refer to site drawings
for location and mounting provisions.
Figure 13:
15 kVA Transformer Installation (MALSR Only)
Top
Dimensions in Inches
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
Electrical
Connections
Operation
Parts
Side
Front
Schematics
Terminal Blocks TB1 through TB8
H1 (MEDIUM
H3 (LOW)
Earth Ground Lug
H2 (HIGH)
NOTE: The preferred method of installation is to locate the power transformer near the
master control cabinet.
36
•
The transformer weighs 262 lb. (118.8 kg). External mounting lugs are provided on the
back of the transformer for vertical mounting. Secure the cabinet to a wall using bolts and
bolt anchors or as specified by the site installation drawings.
•
When the power transformer is mounted out in the field, a concrete pad should be
provided and a steel framework should be fabricated and secured in the concrete pad to
mount the transformer and other equipment as specified in site drawings. Concrete pad
size and structure size are to be determined by contractor and applicable local
specifications.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
3.3.6 Installing Inpavement Flasher on the
Base and ICC Cable
Connections
Install the lightning rod as close as possible to the cabinet.
NOTE: Lightning protection is provided by metal oxide varistors in the master control cabinet
at the input supply terminals of TB1 and the supply power to the individual control cabinet.
The fast-acting metal oxide varistors are most effective if a low resistance ground cable in
compliance with the NEC and local codes, is connected to the lightning rod.

A large amount of charring on the surface of a metal oxide varistor is an indication that the
system has taken a lightning strike. If this has occurred, the varistor has done its job and must
be replaced before placing the system back in operation. After replacing the varistor, test that
the system is operating properly.
Figure 14:
Safety
3.3.5 Installing Lightning
Rod
Disclaimer
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Electrical Connections
Table of
Contents
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
g
The drawings on this page are for reference only and are not intended for design purposes.
For additional design and installation information, refer to the airfield drawings and to 96A0106 instructions.
Installation Introduction
Electrical
Connections
Waterproof field splice (installer provided)
SIDE
Individual Control
Cabinet (front)
IP68 Sealed Electrical Cable Connector
Junction Box JB2
Cordset Connection
In-pavement
Flasher Assembly
Runway*
Runway
Ground Wire
Provide 3-feet of slack
Operation
Conduit from ICC
Ground Rod
* Insure that the ICC is oriented such that when the cabinet door is opened,
a user standing in front of the cabinet is facing in the direction of the flashing
fixture.
Parts
TOP
Schematics
Handhole
Junction Box JB2
?
Drawings on this page,
courtesy of Cleveland Hopkins International Airport
and:
Individual Control Cabinet
To In-pavement Flasher
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
37
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Electrical Connections
Disclaimer
3.3.7 Connecting the Inpavement Flashing Light
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
This subsection provides installation information for the MALSR and ALSF in-pavement
flashing light. It discusses how to connect the Individual Control Cabinet (ICC) wiring to the
light fixture and how to install the light fixture on the base.
Table of
Contents
Pull the interconnection cable between the ICC and the fixture through the conduit. Terminate
the cable at TB2 inside the ICC. See the wiring diagram at the end of this manual for details.
Using a waterproof field splice kit (contractor supplied), splice the interconnection cable to the
mating female connector, part no. 4072.02.960. Set the in-pavement fixture upside down
beside the base can. Plug the fixture male plug into the female plug. Wrap electrical tape
around the male-female plug connection.
Figure 15:
Connections to the Male In-pavement Fixture Connector (field splice kit
not shown)
Safety
White wire, labeled ‘Blue-6’
Black wire, labeled ‘Orange-3’
Introduction Installation
Electrical
Connections
Black wire, labeled ‘Green-Yellow-54’
CABCAB+
PE
+400 V
TRIG
Black wire, labeled ‘RedWhite wire, labeled ‘Brown’
To assemble the in-pavement flasher connector assembly, perform the following procedure:
Operation
1. Install the Individual Control Cabinet (ICC), watertight conduit connectors and pull the
cable as per the ALSF / MALSR instruction manual and the airfield drawings.
2. Prepare the cable wire by stripping wire ends off each end to specified lengths as shown
in Figure 16. Be careful not to cut through the outer jacket into the individual wire
insulation. Repeat for all five wires. Cut the shield wire off at the field splice.
Parts
3. Connect the connection cable, max 393 Ft. (120 m) to the FEMALE connector (shown in
Figure 14) using a waterproof field splice kit. If the female cordset is not labeled, you will
need to make a resistance measurement (tone) and label each wire to make the correct
connections. Cut the cable rubber filler off, so it doesn’t interfere with the installation.
Schematics
4. The in-pavement light fixture is already assembled. The detail between A and B on
Figure 16 is to indicate the fixtures internal wire connections.
5. Connect the 5/C female cordset (4) to the MALE connector.
6. Wrap the connection between the in-pavement light cord and the female cordset with
electrical tape.
7. Connect the remaining end of the connection cable, max 393 Ft. (120 m) to the DIN Plug
(TB2) supplied in the ADB ICC.
38
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Electrical Connections
In-pavement connections
DETAIL A
SCALE 1 : 1
Disclaimer
Figure 16:
Wire Jacket
Wire Insulation
A
Table of
Contents
Wire
B
Safety
A
Stripping Wire Ends
Installation Introduction
Electrical
Connections
FFL-1-120
IN-PAVEMENT
FLASH HEAD
6-pin Connector
Supplied with the SAS ICC
CAB Black
Braided Ground
PE
Yellow / Green Stripe
400 V
Brown
Operation
CAB +
Grey
D
Parts
TRIG
Blue
Schematics
ect
Conn
E
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
39
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Electrical Connections
Disclaimer
3.3.8 Mounting the
Flashing Lights
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
Electrical
Connections
3.3.8.1 Installation on L-868
Base
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
To mount and connect the light assembly, proceed as follows:
Table 15:
Required Tools
Description
Description
Torque wrench
Screwdriver, flat blade AG. 8x150
Socket hex, 3/8”, vis 3/8”, J.9/16LA
Screwdriver, pozi-drive AD.2x125
Socket hex, 3/8”, vis M10, J.17LA
Loctite 270
Socket, 1/4”, 1.6x8 Flat, RS.8E
Loctite 222
Socket, 1/4”, Pozidriv2, RD.2
Molycote BG87 INERTA grease
Extension, 1/4”, R.210
Natural hydraulic vacuum silicone grease
Adaptation, 1/4”-3/8”, R.232
Attack driver
Hinged handle - short
Hammer 212A50
Plier
Bit holder
Opening tool
Bits END202, Pozidriv2
The light assembly is shipped complete, including the lamp, and ready for installation.
To install the in-pavement fixture on an L-868 base, see FAA AC 150/5345-30 and the project
site-specific plans and specifications for details on L-868 base installation.
NOTE: Mounting bolts and anti-rotation lock washers are normally supplied with the base can
spacer or flange ring. If a flange ring is used, the bolt length is 1-1/4 inch (32mm) plus the
thickness of the flange ring.
Also read the following guidelines:
1. Clean the base receptacle. Make sure the base receptacle is completely clean and dry.
The mating surfaces must be clean and free of foreign particles.
CAUTION
Operation
Never hold the light fixture by the wires. Doing so may damage the insulation,
break the waterproof seal and cause insulation faults and water leakage.
2. Carry the light assembly to the base.
3. Place the light assembly beside the opening in the L-868 base so that the light connector
can be connected with the mating receptacle. Make sure that the connection is solid and
secure.
Parts
4. Make sure items such as spacers, shims and gaskets are installed on the light base as
indicated on site plans, specifications and drawings.
5. Position the light assembly over the L-868 base and set it onto the base.
Schematics
CAUTION
A gasket has not been supplied and no gasket is required between the adapter
ring and the base.
Do not install a gasket between the adapter ring and the base. Installing a gasket
prevents correct load transfer when aircraft rolls over it and will hinder the
torquing operation.
WARNING
Ensure that the cord set wires are NOT pinched between the base can and the
fixture. Pinched wires can (a) cause water to be drawn inside the fixture.
6. Attach the six fixing bolts and anti-vibration washers.
WARNING
Due to the risk of bolts vibrating loose, do not use any type of washer with the fixing
bolts (such as split lock washers) other than an anti-vibration washer. Antivibration washers identified as CEC or Nord-Lock® or equivalent must be used.
Nord-Lock part number NL-3/8-SS is recommended for replacement applications.
40
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Electrical Connections
7. If using thread-locking adhesive, apply only one drop of Grade AV Loctite to each of the
six 3/8-inch (9.525mm) diameter mounting bolts. Torque the bolts to 185 ±5 in-lb. (20.902
±0.565 N•m).
Notes on Torquing
1. Always torque the bolts in opposing pairs.
To do so, tighten bolts in the following
sequence (see figure at right):
1
3
Next tighten Bolts #2 and #5
4
3. After several re-lampings, threaded holes
may accumulate dirt and Loctite. If this
occurs, screws may not seat properly.
5
Clean the holes with lightweight oil using
a small fiber brush. Wipe the holes clean
with alcohol to remove all oil or diesel fuel
and dirt. Clean with dry, oil-free, low-pressure air. After a bolt has been retorqued three
times, replace it with a new bolt. If a bolt is continuously loose, inspect the tapped thread
in the light base flange for damage. If the threads are damaged, contact ADB Airfield
Solutions Sales Department for field repair insert kit.
NOTE: Never hold the light fixture by the wires as this may damage the insulation, break the
waterproof seal and cause insulation faults and water leakage.
3.3.9 Wiring the Master
Control Cabinet
See “Schematics” on page 131. All wiring and connections shall be made in accordance with
the National Electrical Code and Local Regulatory Authority and as specified on the
installation drawings.
To wire the master control cabinet, perform the following procedure:
1. Connect 120/240 Vac, single phase, input power (AWG 8, 600 V) to terminal block TB1
terminals TB1-1 (120 V), TB1-2 (N), and TB1-3 (120 V) in the master control cabinet.
2. Connect an earth ground (AWG 4, minimum) wire to the earth ground lug on the master
control cabinet.
3. Connect the flasher power wiring (2 single-conductor, AWG 10, 600 V) from the master
cabinet terminal block TB1 terminals 10 and 12 to terminal block TB1 terminals 1 and 2 in
the junction box closest to the master.
4. Connect all junction boxes in parallel.
5. See Figure 63 or Figure 64 in “Schematics” on page 131. Make remote control
connections (either 120 Vac or +48 Vdc) to terminal block TB2.
6. Make the communications cable connections from the master control cabinet PCB-4
terminal P1 through the junction box to PCB-1498 P1 in the individual control cabinet
using Manhatten Wire M8628010, 18 AWG, Triad, Shielded, 600 V cable or ADBapproved equivalent cable. Then connect PCB-1498 P3 through the junction box to PCB1498 P1 of the next individual control cabinet.
7. Make the remote control/monitoring wiring connections as shown on the external wiring
diagram shown in Figure 63 or Figure 64 for the MALSR and ALSF in “Schematics” on
page 131.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
41
Installation Introduction
Electrical
Connections
6
Operation
2. Applying more than one drop of Loctite to
the bolt threads will make the bolts very
difficult to remove.
Safety
Then tighten Bolts #3 and #6
Parts
•
•
If you start with Bolt #1, then tighten Bolt
#4
Schematics
•
2
Table of
Contents
Figure 17:
Disclaimer
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Aiming the UEL Lamp holders
Disclaimer
3.3.10 To Wire the
Individual Control Cabinet
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Perform the following procedure:
1. Ground cabinet using AWG 10 (minimum) ground wire connected to the ground in the
individual control cabinet and the junction box. Connect ground wire to a grounding rod or
counterpoise installed a short distance from the junction box.
2. Make connections from terminal block TB2 in the junction box to terminal block TB1 in the
individual control cabinet as shown on the wiring diagram.
Table of
Contents
3.3.11 Wiring 15 kVA
Power Transformer
(MALSR Only)
The power transformer supplies power to the PAR-38 approach lights and the PAR-56 steady
burning threshold lights.
To wire the MALSR 15 kVA power transformer, perform the following procedure:
Safety
1. See Figure 63 in the Wiring Schematics section. Connect the master cabinet terminal
strip TB1 terminals 5, 6, and 7 to terminal block TB1 terminals H1 (MEDIUM), H2 (HIGH),
and H3 (LOW) in the power transformer, respectively.
Introduction Installation
Aiming the
UEL Lamp
holders
2. Initially connect the MCC terminal TB1-4 (xfmr common) to 15 kVA transformer TB1-3
through 
TB1-7 (120 Vac). Note that this tap may require adjustment later on to obtain the correct
output voltage.
NOTE: 15 kVA transformer taps TB1-1 through TB1-8 are provided to adjust the output
voltage of the power transformer. Use 3 single-conductor (AWG 4, 600 V) wires for the
connections.
3. Connect an AWG 2 (minimum) ground wire to the earth ground lug on the power
transformer.
4. See Figure 63. Connect terminals X1 (120V/75V/50 Vac), X2 (NEUTRAL), and X3
(120V/75V/50 Vac) on terminal block TB1 in the power transformer to the PAR-38/PAR56 lamp holders. Use 3 single-conductor (AWG 2, 600 V) wires for the connections for
each terminal.
Operation
3.4 Aiming the UEL
Lamp holders
An aiming device is used to set the vertical angular position of the lamps. The lamp holders
are mounted on either conduit, pipe, or towers as outlined in the site installation drawings.
For elevated flashing fixtures, the aiming device is available either as an electronic or as a
simple mechanical (bubble level) based unit. Both aiming devices are accurate to within
±0.5°.
Table 16:
Elevated Flasher Aiming Devices
Parts
Device
Part No.
1
Schematics
3.4.1 Bubble Level Aiming
Device
Electronic Aiming Device
1570.05.400
Bubble Level Aiming Device2
1570.05.410
1
For fixture mounting heights from 6 ft. (1.82 m) to 33 ft. (10 m)
2
For fixture mounting heights below 6 ft. (1.82 m)
The bubble level aiming device consists of a support, which is secured on the light unit, in the
place of the optical cartridge, and which is equipped with a elevation angle setting device, a
sighting device (both with a graduated scale) and a bubble level.
The elevation angle setting device is graduated from 0 to 25°. For the azimuth setting, the
system can be rotated around a vertical axis, and has 4 set positions that allow aiming at
reference points (generally other lights) in a direction parallel or perpendicular to the center
line. The sighting device is graduated from -4 to +4° to allow for toe-in angles. Two additional
set positions at -15 and +15° permit the setting of elevated REIL/RTIL flashing lights.
1. Assemble the system by removing the optical cartridge and installing the leveling device
in its place.
2. Tighten the securing screw.
42
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
3. Set the elevation angle on the setting device and the azimuth (toe-in) angle on the
sighting device. For the correct elevation and toe-in angles refer to the project plans and
specifications.
NOTE: FAA MALSR fixtures are usually set at +6°.
4. Approximately level the light to allow the azimuth orientation of the light.
5. Set the light in the correct direction using the sighting device, aiming at the next or former
light in the same alignment. For lights in a barrette, a side row or a wing bar, aiming
laterally at another light is possible. For this purpose release the two locking levers, turn
the system 90° until a distinct click can be felt, and tighten the locking levers. If there is no
light in the same alignment, use a reference pole.
Disclaimer
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Aiming the UEL Lamp holders
Table of
Contents
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
7. Use the bubble level to set the light at the correct elevation by unscrewing/ tightening
slightly the two elevation angle adjustment screws. Tighten the screws sufficiently to
avoid any play, but do not over-tighten them. Once this is done, secure the two lock-nuts.
Figure 18:
g
Installation Introduction
Aiming the
UEL Lamp
holders
8. Remove the device. Put the optical cartridge back in place, connect the lamp and latch
the lamp.
Bubble Level Aiming Device (1570.05.410)
eye
Sighting mirror (See note)
Elevation angle
setting device
Sighting device
Bubble level
Securing screw
ce.
Operation
has
a direction
rom
5° permit
Securing screw
) angle
Locking levers
Parts
and
he light.
Elevation angle
adjustment screws
and lock-nuts
rewing/
en the
Once
Schematics
at the
side row
rpose
ck can be
Bracing clamp
NOTE: Use the mirror to look down through the sighting device for horizontal alignment. You
may optionally look directly through the sighting device by loosening the mirror securing
screw and rotating it out of the way.
3.4.1.1 Adjusting Horizontal
Safety
6. Secure the bracing clamp. Loosen the lock-nuts.
To adjust the horizontal, perform the following procedure:
1. Loosen the 3 screws in slip collar and/or the 8-32 set screw in the slip collar.
2. Rotate the assembly to the correct horizontal position with the center of the light beam
parallel to the runway centerline.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
43
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Aiming the UEL Lamp holders
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
3. Retighten screws.
3.4.2 Electronic Aiming
Device
This system is suited for elevated fixtures mounted on safety approach masts or fiberglass
towers, when it is not possible to get access to the top of the mast/tower in its standing
position.
Table of
Contents
Composition: The system consists of a support similar to the one used with the bubble level
device (see “Bubble Level Aiming Device” on page 42). However, the support is equipped
with a sensor activated with a switch, with a 33 ft. (10 m) long cable. The operator can then
operate the sensor from the ground, and read the elevation angle measurement when the
mast/tower is tilted on the ground.
NOTE: During the installation of the approach line, a quicker method is to use a platform at
the light level for an easy initial adjustment.
Safety
Figure 19:
Sighting mirror
Introduction Installation
Aiming the
UEL Lamp
holders
Operation
Parts
Graduated scale
(elevation)
Schematics
Elevation angle
adjustment screws
3.4.3 Commissioning
Electronic Aiming Device (1570.05.400)
Step
Action
1
Lower the mast. See instruction manual of the
supplied masts.
2
If the mast has been correctly installed, i.e. its
tilting axis is perpendicular to the centre line, a
light with 0° toe-in will have its front surface fully
horizontal when the mast is tilted over 90° (down
to the horizontal). With the mast in this position,
adjust the light by turning it around the tube, and
then tighten the bracing clamp. For lights with a
toe-in, first adjust the light for 0° toe-in. Make a
reference mark on the tube just below the zero
mark at the bottom of the slip fitter. Using the
graduated scale, turn the light around the tube to
the desired toe-in, and tighten the bracing clamp.
3
Remove the optical cartridge and install the
leveling device in its place. Tighten the securing
screw.
4
Raise the mast. Operate the switch to take a
measurement.
5
Lower the mast and read the angle indicated on
the digital display. Calculate the difference
between the real angle and the required one.
6
If necessary, adjust the elevation angle by
unscrewing/tightening slightly the two opposite
screws. Tighten the screws sufficiently to avoid
any play, but do not overtighten them. Once this
is done, secure the two counter-nuts. While doing
the correction, two measurements means are
useable: - The elevation scale on the side of the
light body (coarse measurement); - The leveling
device itself, by taking a measurement before and
after correction (fine measurement).
7
Raise the mast and repeat the operation 6 until
the adjustment is correct.
8
Lower the mast and remove the device. Put the
optical cartridge back in place, without forgetting
to connect the lamp.
Final check: A flight check must be performed to insure there is no major misalignment of
the fixtures.
NOTE: The system must not be put in operation until all errors have been corrected and the
flight check is passed successfully.
44
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
A separate aiming device (for PAR-56 only, order 44D1654-1 or for PAR-56 and PAR-38,
order 44D1654-2) is used to set the vertical angular position of the steady burning elevated
lamps. The lamp holders are mounted on either conduit, pipe, or towers as outlined in the site
installation drawings.
3.5.1 Assembling the
Aiming Device
To assemble the aiming device, perform the following procedure:
1. Remove the aiming device components from the instrument case.
2. See Figure 20. Remove two #10-32 x ¾ screws (1) from the aiming device mounting pad
(2).
The PAR-56 Aiming Device
1.
2.
3.
4.
Safety
Figure 20:
1#1032 x ¾ Screws
Bottom of Mounting Pad
Aiming Device Dial Face
Locking Lever
3. See Figure 21. Take the base plate (6) (round disc with three standoffs) and rotate so that
the standoff (3), located at 15 degrees above the horizontal, is positioned to the right of
the assembler.
Figure 21:
Top View
Mounting the PAR-56 Aiming Device
Side View
(1) Aiming Device Dial
(2) # 1032 x 3/4 Screws
(3) Standoff Located at 15 Degrees
(1) Aiming Device
Dial
Operation
(2) # 1032 x 3/4
Screws
(4) Mounting Pad
(6) Base Plate
Schematics
Parts
(5)
Locking
Lever
Table of
Contents
3.5 Aiming the PAR-56
Lamp holders
Disclaimer
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Aiming the PAR-56 Lamp holders
Installation Introduction
Aiming the
PAR-56
Lamp hold-
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
(4) Mounting Pad
(6) Base Plate
(5) Locking Lever
4. Take the aiming device and turn it so that when mounted on the base plate (6) the dial (1)
is facing toward the single standoff (3) located at 15 degrees. Position the two tapped
holes in the bottom of the mounting pad over the mating holes in the base plate. Insert
mounting pad screws (2) and lock washers and tighten hardware.
5. See Figure 22. Rotate the three-leg clamps (3) so that the tapered tang on the clamp is at
a right angle to the back edge of the standoff by pushing down on the spring-loaded
shoulder screw (5).
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
45
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Aiming the PAR-56 Lamp holders
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Figure 22:
Aiming Device Leg Clamp Locations (Top View)
1
Table of
Contents
1. Locking
Lever
2. Section
View of
Leg
Clamp
3. SpringLoaded
Shoulder
Screw
4. Leg Clamp
Locations
5. Index Pin
2
Safety
5
3
4
Introduction Installation
Aiming the
PAR-56
Lamp hold-
6. Attach the snap-swivel and cord to the aiming dial locking lever (1) if the lever cannot be
reached during the aiming procedure. The aiming device is now ready to be mounted on
the lampholder.
Operation
Parts
Schematics
46
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
To aim lamp holders, perform the following procedure:
1. After the lamp holder has been wired and secured to conduit or pipe and aligned with the
runway centerline per site specifications, secure the aiming device to the lampholder.
2. Take the assembled aiming device and position it over the face of the lamp and align the
three indexing pins (see Figure 22, Item 5), protruding from each of the standoffs, with the
three mating index pin holes (see Figure 23, Item 2) found in the flanged lip of the 
lamp holder.
NOTE: See Figure 23. These indexing pins and holes are located at 75, 225, and 315
degrees.
Safety
Lamp Holder (Top View)
1
2
Installation Introduction
Aiming the
PAR-56
Lamp hold-
1. Lamp Clips
2. Index Pin Holes
2
1
Operation
1
2
3. See Figure 21. Place the index pin located in the standoff (3) located 15 degrees
counterclockwise from horizontal into the index hole located approximately at 2 o’clock
position on the lamp holders flanged lip.
NOTE: After this first index pin has been inserted into the correct hole, the other two index
pins will fit only into their correct holes.

See Figure 20. When the aiming device has been installed correctly, the aiming device dial
face (4) is located to the installer’s right and the device hangs vertically.

Once the aiming device is oriented correctly and index pins are inserted into the index holes,
the standoffs will set against the lip of the lampholder.
4. See Figure 22. To clamp the aiming device onto the lamp holder, rotate the three leg
clamps (3) by pushing down on the spring-loaded shoulder screws (5), so that the tapered
tang grips the backside of lamp holder's rim. Once the leg clamp is in position, release the
pressure on the spring-loaded shoulder screw.
5. See Figure 21. Release the aiming dial (1) by pulling back on the locking lever (5) and
holding open 
with the hasp.
6. See Figure 24. To aim the lamp holder to the required vertical setting, loosen the two
1/4-20 jam nuts (1) on the adjusting screws (2, 4) located on the side of the lamp holder's
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
47
Parts
Figure 23:
Disclaimer
This section outlines the procedure to aim steady burning that are mounted at ground level to
approximately a six-foot (1.83 m) elevation (or easily reached by a ladder).
Schematics
3.5.1.1 Aiming Lamp holders
(Conduit or Pipe Mounted)
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Aiming the PAR-56 Lamp holders
Table of
Contents
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Aiming the PAR-56 Lamp holders
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
slip fitter, and then turn both adjusting screws until the required elevation setting is
reached on the aiming device dial.
Table of
Contents
NOTE: The scale on the aiming device dial is calibrated in 1-degree increments.

The adjusting screws are designed to work against each other. If one screw is turned
clockwise, as viewed from the head of the screw, then the other screw is turned
counterclockwise to effect a change in elevation setting.
Figure 24:
Slip Fitter Dial Face and Adjusting Screws
(5) Slip Fitter Dial
(4) Adjusting Screw
(1) Jam Nuts
(2) Adjusting Screw
Safety
(3) Slip Fitter 
Screw
Introduction Installation
Aiming the
PAR-56
Lamp hold-
7. Once the desired setting is achieved, make sure that both adjusting screws are seated
against screw stops, then retighten all jam nuts to lock adjusting screws in place.
Operation
NOTE: Recheck to make sure the angle setting has not changed when screws/nuts were
tightened. If the setting has changed, loosen nuts and adjust accordingly.
8. Remove the aiming device fixture by rotating the leg clamps away from the lamp holder's
flanged lip.
9. Repeat above steps for each lamp holder in the system.
Parts
3.5.1.2 Aiming the Lamp
holders (Tower Mounted)
This subsection outlines the procedure to aim steady burning or flashing PAR-56 lamp units
that are mounted on aluminum or fiberglass towers (masts).
To aim the tower-mounted lamp holders, perform the following procedure:
Schematics
1. Place the tower in the down position. Rest the tower on a sawhorse or other adequate
support structure. Mount and wire the lamp unit and align with the runway centerline per
site specifications.
2. See Figure 23. Loosen 1/420 jam nuts (1) on the adjusting screws (2, 4) that are located
on the sides of the lamp holder's slip fitter.
3. Turn the adjusting screws so that the bottom edge of the lamp holder is aligned with the
zero angle setting as marked on the dial (5) on the side of the slip fitter. Retighten the jam
nuts to lock the lamp holder in the zero position.
4. See Figure 21. Take the assembled aiming device, remove the aiming dial, and then
install the dial on the slip section, supplied by tower manufacturer (For example: the
VEGA F.A.M. by Jaquith Industries) using the dial strap clamp. Release the aiming dial by
pulling back on the locking lever (5), and hold the lever open with the hasp.
5. See Figure 24. Read and record the angle of the tower as it rests on the sawhorse, then
aim the lamp holder to the required vertical setting by loosening the two 1/420 jam nuts
48
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
6. Now remove the aiming dial from the tower’s slip section, reassemble on the base plate,
and install the aiming assembly on the lampholder.
7. After the setting has been reached, tighten both jam nuts on the adjusting screws to lock
the lamp holder into position.
8. Now lock the aiming dial in place by releasing the hasp. The locking lever will now prevent
the dial from turning.
9. Attach the snap-swivel and nylon cord to the locking lever before raising the tower.
10. Raise and lock the tower into vertical position. Pull on the cord and hold to allow the
aiming dial to rotate so that it can measure the elevation angle of the lampholder.
11. After the aiming dial has come to rest, release the cord and lock the dial in place. Lower
the tower and read the elevation setting of the lamp holder. If the desired setting has not
been obtained, release the dial and loosen the jam nuts on the adjusting screws. Turn the
screws accordingly to correct the elevation setting.
12. Repeat steps 6 through 11.
Schematics
Parts
13. After the correct elevation has been achieved, secure the tower and repeat the process
for all remaining towers.
Table of
Contents
Example: Elevation desired is 14 degrees. The aiming dial in free mode reads 84
degrees. 
The angle of the tower on the sawhorse (recorded previously) is 10 degrees. 
To determine the elevation setting, perform the following:

First, turn the adjusting screws until the aiming dial reads 90 degrees minus 10 degrees =
80 degrees.

Second, subtract the desired elevation angle (14 degrees) from 80 degrees. The result is
66 degrees (90-10-14 = 66). This is the new angle required. Continue turning adjusting
screws until this setting is reached.
Safety
NOTE: To make an accurate determination of the required elevation setting while the
tower is resting on the sawhorse, compensation must be made for both the angle of the
tower and the natural droop at the top of the tower due to its weight. Refer below for an
example of how to compensate for these two factors.
Installation Introduction
Aiming the
PAR-56
Lamp hold-
(1) on the adjusting screws again and turning the screws until the required elevation
setting is reached.
Disclaimer
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Aiming the PAR-56 Lamp holders
Operation
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
49
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Aiming the PAR-56 Lamp holders
Disclaimer
3.5.2 Aiming PAR-38 Lamp
holders (MALSR Only)
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
To aim the MALSR PAR-38 lamp holders, perform the following procedure:
1. See Figure 25. Install PAR-38 lamp holder assembly (5), less PAR-38 lamp, onto the
appropriate mount such as a frangible coupling or an EMT.
2. Secure by tightening the three screws (4) in the slip fitter.
Figure 25:
MALSR PAR-38 Aiming Device
Table of
Contents
1
2
Safety
Introduction Installation
Aiming the
PAR-56
Lamp hold-
10
1. PAR-38 Socket Adapter
3
9
2. PAR-38 Support Plug
8
3. Socket Elbow Screw
4. Slip Fitter Screw
5. Slip Fitter Set Screw
7
6. PAR-38 Lamp holder Assembly
7. Screw
6
Operation
8. Mounting Adapter Screw
9. Aiming Device Mounting Adapter
10. Aiming Device
Parts
3.5.2.1 Adjusting Horizontal
5
4
To adjust the horizontal, perform the following procedure:
Schematics
1. See Figure 25. Loosen the 3 screws (4) in slip fitter and/or the 8-32 set screw (5) in the
slip fitter’s collar.
2. Rotate the assembly to the correct horizontal position with the center of the light beam
parallel to the runway centerline.
3. Retighten the screws.
50
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
To adjust the vertical, perform the following procedure:
1. See Figure 25. Attach the PAR-38 support plug (2) onto the socket adapter (1).
NOTE: The tapered end of the support plug should be on the same end as the threads on the
socket adapter. Locate the support plug 2.124 inches (5.4 cm) from the threaded end of the
socket adapter (1) and tighten the set screw (5) to hold in place.
2. Attach aiming device mounting adapter (9) to aiming device (10) using two screws (8).
3. Loosen the screw in the socket elbow (3) of the lamp holder and rotate the lamp holder (6)
to convenient working angle (approximately 45 degrees) and retighten screw.
4. Make sure that the power to the lamps has been turned off.
Disclaimer
3.5.2.2 Adjusting Vertical
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Aiming the PAR-56 Lamp holders
Table of
Contents
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Safety
5. Screw the socket adapter (1) with support plug (2) attached into the lamp socket in the
lampholder.
6. Place the aiming device (10) with mounting adapter (9) attached onto the end of the
socket adapter (1).
Installation Introduction
Aiming the
PAR-56
Lamp hold-
7. Position the dial face of the aiming device vertically so that the dial can be read and is
level so that the dial can rotate freely. Tighten the two set screws (7) in the mounting
adapter’s sleeve to hold in position.
8. Loosen the screw (8) in the elbow of the lamp holder (3) and move the lamp holder to
correct the vertical angle (according to site specifications). Tighten screw and recheck
setting.
Schematics
Parts
Operation
NOTE: Refer to manual 96A0119 for mounting and aiming the 44D1661-XXXX SteadyBurning Approach Light.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
51
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Aiming the PAR-56 Lamp holders
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
Aiming the
PAR-56
Lamp holdOperation
Parts
Schematics
52
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
4.1 Interlock Switches
Interlock switches are provided on all the flashers and control cabinets to disconnect power
when a cabinet door or flasher is opened. The interlock switch is closed on the master and
individual control cabinets when the cabinet door is closed and the screws on the door are
tightened. The interlock switch on the master and individual control cabinets can be bypassed
for servicing by simply pulling out the shaft of the interlock switch. However, the interlock
switch on the flasher can be defeated only by carefully shorting terminals CAB+ and CAB- on
terminal block TB2 in the ICC.
Operating the MALSR/ALSF involves local and remote control; interlock switches; ground
fault interpreter; controls and indicators on Local Master PCB, and the Flasher Control PCBs;
start-up and emergency, equipment, and individual cabinet shutdown procedures; and radio
controller operations (MALSR only).
The MALSR/ALSF system can be operated by local control by manually setting switches on
the control panel in the master control cabinet. The MALSR/ALSF can also be operated by
remote control using +24 Vdc, +48 Vdc or 120 Vac signals to turn the system on or off and to
set the system to one of three brightness levels: low, medium, or high.
Refer to Table 17. Local control uses five-position rotary switch S5 on the control panel in the
master control cabinet. Refer to Table 18 for more information about local and remote
control.
Local Control Switch S5 Functions
Switch Position
OFF
Turns system off
LOW
Turns system on to low intensity
MEDIUM
HIGH
Operation
REMOTE
Function
System operates by 120 Vac, +24 Vdc or, +48
Vdc signals only. Turns on system to one of
three intensity levels or off from an interface
panel or air-ground receiver.
Turns system on to medium intensity
Turns system on to high intensity
4.3 Master Control
Cabinet Controls and
Indicators
See “Manual configuration” on page 56 for configuration details. Refer to Table 18 for master
control cabinet controls and indicators.
4.4 Ground Fault
Interpreter
The ground fault interpreter (GFI) outlet (3) on the master control cabinet supplies 120 Vac
power for operation of external equipment. This outlet is designed to prevent accidental
electrocution of the operator using the outlet. The Test button is used to test the operation of
the GFI outlet. The Reset button is used to reset the GFI outlet when it is tripped.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
53
Parts
Table 17:
Schematics
4.2 Local and Remote
Control
Table of
Contents
This section provides information for operating the medium intensity approach lighting system
with runway alignment indicator lights (MALSR) and approach lighting system with
sequenced flashers (ALSF).
Safety
4.0 Operation
Disclaimer
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Operation
Installation Introduction
Operation
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Controls and Indicators
Disclaimer
4.5 Controls and
Indicators
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
This subsection describes controls and indicators for the master control cabinet, the Local
Master PCB, and the Flasher Control PCB.
Table 18:
Item
Master Control Cabinet Controls and Indicators
Controls/Indicators
Function
Note
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
Controls
and Indicators
1
Interlock switch
Allows the master control cabinet to be energized when the door is closed. Refer to
Interlock Switches in this section.
2
Switch S2
Turns maintenance light on or off.
4
Fuse F1 (5 A)
Protects maintenance light circuit.
5
Fuse F2 (15 A)
Protects 120 Vac receptacle.
6
Hour Meter
Records number of hours of lamp operation at the high intensity level.
7
Fuse F3
Spare
8
Fuse F4 (10 A)
Protects power to contactors, remote control and PC boards.
9
Circuit breaker CB2 (15 A)
Protects interlock switch (120 Vac) and equipment connected to fuse F4.
10
Fuse F5
Spare
11
Circuit breaker CB3 (30 A)
Protects 240 Vac power supply to contactor K4 and power to the individual control
cabinets.
12
Circuit breaker CB1 (100 A)
Provides 120/240 Vac power for disconnect switch to turn system on or off.
Switch S3
Selects ALSF and SSALR modes as long as rotary switch S5 has not been set to
REMOTE.
13
(ALSF/SSALR only)
B
Operation
Switch S4 (MALSR only)
Allows the sequenced flashers to be turned on or off when the approach lights are
energized.
14
NEON indicator HI
When lit, indicates system on high intensity.
15
NEON indicator MED
When lit, indicates system on medium intensity.
16
NEON indicator LOW
When lit, indicates system on low intensity.
17
Switch S5
Selects operational mode. Under remote operation, allows the system to be turned on
to one of three intensity levels or turned off from an interface panel or air-ground
receiver. Refer to Table 17.
32
Circuit breaker CB4 (70 A)
(MALSR only)
Protects 120/240 Vac steady burning approach light power.
33
ON/OFF indicator
(MALSR only)
A
When lit, indicates system is turned on.
Parts
NOTE A: The LOW NEON Light is lit when
•
•
•
•
S5 is set to LOW.
S5 is set to REMOTE and remote control switch is set to LOW.
S5 is set to OFF and voltage is present.
REMOTE is set to OFF and voltage is present. (This indicates that the master is in hot standby mode.)
Schematics
NOTE B: The maintenance light will operate even if the power disconnect switch has been opened.
Unscrew wire cage to replace lamp.
54
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Controls and Indicators
Circuit breaker, 15 A (AIRPAX #219-2-1-63F-3-15)
#11 or 32
CB3/4
Circuit breaker, 30 A (AIRPAX #219-2-1-62-3-1-30)
#12
CB1
#12
CB1
Disclaimer
Master Control Cabinet Parts and Diagram (MALSR Shown)
CB2
Switch, MALSR, 120/240 Vac, 100A
(AIRPAX #219-2-1-63F-3-1-100)
Switch, ALSF, 120/240 Vac, 100A
Table of
Contents
Figure 26:
#9
(AIRPAX #219-2-0-SW-3-1-100)
#6
#1
Safety
Ground fault outlet
#33
#13
#14
#15
#16
#2
#4, 5, 7, 8 and 10
Installation Introduction
Controls
and Indicators
Maintenance Lamp
#17
K1 (MALSR)
Cont 2P 30 A 120
Vac Coil
53A0412-30
PCB 1486
Operation
Varistor (VR1 - VR4)
Parts
PCB1485
K2, K3, (MALSR) K4
Cont 2P 60 A 
120 Vac Coil
53A0412-60
Schematics
PCB 1498
Assembly
Figure 58
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
55
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Controls and Indicators
Disclaimer
4.5.1 Configuration
4.5.2 Before you start
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
The configuration can be done either manually or by means of a laptop & software interfacing
with the ICC via the Dongle.
NOTE: The ALSF can only be configured by means of a laptop and software.
CAUTION
Table of
Contents
•
Make sure that if a Dip-switch setting has been changed in any
cabinet, the main power supply is switched off for a few
seconds in order to confirm the change of the dip-witch in the
cabinet where the change took place. If this is not done, the
system will not recognise the hardware (dip-switch) change.
4.5.3 Manual configuration
Safety
4.5.3.1 Action 1: Configuration
of the ICCs
•
Set the dip-switch bank SW2 on each ICC so that the slave number of the first ICC
corresponds to 1, and that the number for each following ICC is incremented by one, up to
the last ICC . The slave number is set using binary code. (i.e. 00011 binary = 3 decimal).
•
For the dip-switch settings of each ICC , refer to Table 26.
Introduction Installation
Controls
and Indicators
NOTE: The factory setting for the local bus communication is:
38400 baud (SW 1-5 is OFF & SW 1-6 is ON);
even parity (SW 1-7 is ON & SW 1-8 is ON).
Dip-switches SW 1-1 to SW 1-4 are not used.
This configuration must be the same for all the units connected to this bus. This is the factory
& recommended setting. These values should not be changed, except if severe problems
occur in the communication between the different flasher units.
Operation
4.5.3.2 Action 2: Configuration
of the MCC (PCB)
•
If the MCC is physically installed at either end of the flashers check if all the jumpers
(W11, W25, W28) are removed on the Flasher Control PCBs, except for the ICC farthest
from the MCC. See the drawings at the end of this manual.
•
If the MCC is physically located somewhere in the middle of the flashers, both the
physical routing of the CAT5e communication cable wire and the jumpers (W11, W25,
W28) are different for this type of installation. See “Manual Configurations Overview” on
page 84
For the Dip-switch settings of the MCC refer to Table 19.
NOTE: The local bus communication setting (baud rate, parity) should be the same for each
ICC.
Parts
Parameters that must be defined by setting the dip-switches on the MCC are:
•
The number of ICCs in the system is defined by SW5-1 to SW5-6 (Note that the value that
is set is in binary code).
Schematics
For 1 to 31 ICCs the number must be converted to a binary value and for each bit 1, the
corresponding switch must be set to ON.
56
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
If SW2/3 is set, the last 2 ICCs are declared as REIL1 and REIL 2 respectively. Their
misfire limit is set to 1.
•
The cycle value of mode 1 is set according to SW2/4:
SW2/4
1 cycle per second
OFF
2 cycles per second
The sequence times of mode 1 are set using SW2/1 and SW2/2
Table 19:
Table of
Contents
•
ON
Disclaimer
•
Dip-switch Settings
Dip-switch bank SW2
Mode
SW2/1
SW2/2
OFF
OFF
ON
16 msec
OFF
33 msec
OFF
ON
66 msec
ON
ON
Invalid!
Number
NAME
1
ALSF-2
3
ALSF-1
2
SSALR
4
SSALS/F
5
MALS/F
6
MALSR
7
(ODALS)
Safety
Sequence time
The sequence time of the first ICC is set to 0, the next ICCs will have a sequence time equal
to the interval time defined by the switches, multiplied by their slave number in the system. If
a REIL system is included in the configuration, the 2 last ICCs receive the same flash timing.
If the manual configuration option is selected, the dongle and software will not be useable.
Also when the system is configured via the manual configuration (not via the dongle &
software) the physical connection needs to be logically in accordance with the sequence of
the ICCs, i.e. ICC with address 1 needs to be physically the first in the communication line,
ICC 2 the 2nd, etc… The MCC and last ICC is used to terminate the local bus communication
line.
Setting
SW1
Dip
xxxxxxxx
SW2
Dip
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Rotary
Remarks
Not used, assuming a multi-wire
remote control is implemented.
1 +
2
OFF
OFF
16 msec interval time (1 / second)
ON
OFF
33 msec interval time (2 / second)
OFF
ON
66 msec interval time (4 / second)
ON
ON
Invalid
3
ON
Declaration of REILS
ON
1 cycle per second
OFF
2 cycles per second
4
SW3
Use
0
Flasher system OFF
1
Step 1
2
Step 2
3
Step 3
9
Remote Control
Parts
Type
Schematics
Switchbank
Installation Introduction
Controls
and Indicators
4.5.3.3 For 32 ICCs, all
switches must be set to OFF.
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Controls and Indicators
Operation
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
57
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Controls and Indicators
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Switchbank
Type
Setting
1
Table of
Contents
Dip
OFF
Enabling of the control by the LMC
PCB rotary switch SW3
ON
Hardware local kill ON
2
OFF
See note 1
3
OFF
See note 2
OFF
Configuration via dongle & software
ON
Manual config by SW2 and SW5
4
SW4
Use
Safety
5 +
6
OFF
OFF
Baud rate local bus 9600 baud
ON
OFF
Baud rate local bus19200 baud
OFF
ON
Baud rate local bus 38400 baud
ON
ON
invalid
No control by SW3
DEFAULT SETTING
Introduction Installation
Controls
and Indicators
7 +
8
OFF
OFF
No parity
ON
OFF
Invalid (no parity)
OFF
ON
Local bus Odd parity
ON
Local bus Even parity
DEFAULT SETTING
Number of ICCs in the system
Binary coding
ON
1 >6
SW5
Remarks
7
Dip
8
Not used
OFF
Disabling the use of the dongle
ON
Enabling the use of the dongle
Operation
NOTE: SW4-2 - Initialize the data of E²PROM
The MCC stores the system parameters in an E²PROM. At first power-up or when the system
must be completely reconfigured, it is possible to clear the E²PROM and return to the default
factory settings. To do this, put the switch to ON, power down the MCC and turn it ON again
after 5 seconds. Do not forget to set the switch back to OFF or the E²PROM will once again
be cleared at the next power cycle!!
WARNING
•
Parts
This will clear all the parameters, the system layout included.
They must then all be restored via the software, or by using the
dip-switches.
Schematics
NOTE: SW4/3 - Lock to boot
This switch is always OFF in a functioning system. It is only used if there is a major problem
during upload of a new application code.
FCU
FCU
(W11, W25, W28)
jumpers
58
FCU
FCU
MCC
FCU
FCU
FCU
(W11, W25, W28)
jumpers
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
4.5.4 Configuration via the
Dongle
Set the slave number on SW2 for each ICC so that every slave has a unique address.
The slave number is set using binary code. (i.e. 00011 binary = decimal 3). For the ease
of defining the layout through the software, choose a logical numeric sequence
addressing of the ICCs.
•
For the dip-switch settings of each ICC, refer to Table 26.
Table of
Contents
•
The factory setting for the local bus communication is:
— 38400 baud 
(SW1-5 is OFF and SW1-6 is ON).
— Dip-switches 
SW1-1 to SW1-4 are not used.
These settings must be the same for all the units connected to this bus. This is the factory
and recommended setting. These values should not be changed, except if severe problems
occur in the communication between the different flasher units.
4.5.4.2 Action 2: Configuration
of the MCC (Local Master PCB)
•
Check if all the jumpers (W11, W25, W28) are removed on the Flasher Control PCBs,
except for the ICC farthest from the MCC on the local bus. Install jumpers (W15, W16 &
W18) on the Local Master PCB.
•
Set the dip-switch SW4-4 on the MCC in position “Off” and SW5-8 to “ON” to enable the
dongle use.
•
The settings for the local bus communication should be:
— 38400 baud (SW4-5 is OFF and SW4-6 is ON)
— Even parity (SW4-7 is ON and SW4-8 is ON)
NOTE: The local bus communication settings (baud rate, parity) should be the same as for
the ICCs (see note above).
4.5.4.4 Action 4: Software
based configuration
•
•
•
•
Connect the “dongle” to any ICC or to the LMC PCB via the serial DB-9 connector.
Connect your laptop loaded with the software, latest version, to the dongle.
Launch the Flasher.exe program.
Verify in the configuration menu that the COM port and the communication parameters
have been selected in accordance with your laptop configuration.
Parts
4.5.4.3 Action 3: Connect the
dongle & define the layout
through the software
NOTE: You need the configuration tool to perform this procedure. 
See “Configuration tool” on page 92.
To configure the equipment with the configuration tool, set the switches of the Local Master
Controller (LMC) PCB as described in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Enable local control;
Enable software configuration;
Set the number of FCUs in the system;
Restart the LMC;
Define the system layout with the configuration tool;
Define the flashing mode with the configuration tool.
Enable local control
The MCC rotary switch should be set to LOW intensity in LOCAL during this procedures.
Also, set the LMC rotary switch to 0. When finished, return the LMC rotary switch to position
9.
Enable software configuration
To enable software configuration, set switch SW4 of the LMC PCB as follows:
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Installation Introduction
Controls
and Indicators
Safety
— Even parity 
(SW1-7 is ON and SW1-8 is ON).
Operation
4.5.4.1 Action 1: Configuration
of the ICCs
Disclaimer
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Controls and Indicators
59
Schematics
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Controls and Indicators
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Table 20:
Dip-switch SW4 settings of the LMC PCB
Setting
Dip-switch 1-6 of switch SW4
1
2
3
4
5
ON
OFF
x
x
x
x
6
7
8
x
x
x
x
Table of
Contents
Set number of FCUs in system
Set switch SW5 of the LMC PCB as follows. In SW5, dip-switches 1-6 represent the total
number of FCUs in the system. For dip-switches 1-6, set the same binary address as you set
for the last FCU in the entire system (FCU PCB, SW2). Set SW5-7 to OFF and SW5-8 to ON.
Safety
Restart the LMC
To activate the dip-switch settings in the whole system, you must switch OFF the power in the
MCC, which contains the LMC.
1. Make sure that the other cabinets in the system are switched ON.
Introduction Installation
Controls
and Indicators
2. Switch OFF power to the MCC. Leave the power off for approximately 10 seconds.
3. Switch ON power to the MCC.
Define the system layout
Define the number of FCUs and boxes in the system and set a layout for the units. The FCU
layout determines the order in which the lamps flash during a flashing sequence.
CAUTION
Operation
Make sure that all flash units are connected to the FCUs in a logical order. For
example, the first flash unit is the one that is farthest away from the runway. If
the system has REILs, they must be closest to the runway and have the highest
logical address.
1. Open the configuration tool.
2. Go to menu Layout.
Parts
Schematics
3. Set the number of flashers, including REIL flashers. See the graphic.
60
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Controls and Indicators
4. Set the number of boxes in your system. See the graphic.
5. Set a sequence and a slave number for each flasher.
6. Set some of the flashers to be REILs or RTILs, if applicable to your system. Click the field
after the sequence number. See the graphic.
9. Go to section Flasher data.
10. Press Status.
11. Make sure that the status of LMC and all flashers is Online. If they are not on-line, check
the power supply to all cabinets, the position of the door switch, the binary addresses on
the FCU PCBs, and the local bus communication cable.
Operation
8. Check the message windows that appears on screen. “Layout OK” means that the new
layout was sent successfully. “Layout Not OK” means that you must check the layout and
the dip-switch settings again.
Installation Introduction
Controls
and Indicators
Safety
Table of
Contents
7. Press Program. See the graphic. The changes are now sent to the LMC.
Disclaimer
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Define the flashing mode
Flashing modes
Mode
Description
ALSF-1
Approach Light System with Sequenced Flashing Lights (ILS Cat-I Configuration)
ALSF-2
Approach Light System with Sequenced Flashing Lights (ILS Cat-II Configuration)
SSALR
Simplified Short Approach Lighting System with Runway Alignment Indicator
SSALS
Simplified Short Approach Lighting System with Sequenced Flasher
MALSR
Medium-Intensity Approach Lighting System with Runway Alignment Indicator
MALSF
Medium-Intensity Approach Lighting System with Sequenced Flashers
ODALS
Omni Directional Approach Lighting System
Custom
To be defined by the customer.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Schematics
Table 21:
Parts
The following flashing modes are available:
61
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Controls and Indicators
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
1. Open the configuration tool.
Table of
Contents
Safety
2. Switch the equipment ON.
3. Select the menu Modes.
4. Go to section Operational modes.
Introduction Installation
Controls
and Indicators
5. Select the active mode. Click the field next to the mode description to make it active (see
the graphic).
6. Modify the available modes, if necessary. Click a mode field to show the mode details in
section Details of mode.
7. Define the Cycle time for each mode. This is the time it takes for all units to flash once in
the predefined sequence.
Operation
Parts
8. Define which flashers are included in the selected mode. To include a flasher, click on the
flasher name so that the background color changes.
9. Set the correct sequence time in milliseconds.
Schematics
4.5.4.5 Action 5: Definition of
the Inputs and Outputs
Depending on what type of control & back-indication signals will be used, you must change
parameters in the ‘IO’ menu. The parameters for the MW control & back-indication can be
changed in this menu.
NOTE: The system can only be completely configured if the power supply is present in all
cabinets.

Via the control menu you can switch on the system at the chosen brilliancy. OFF - STEP1 STEP2 - STEP3. The REILS or RTILS must be switched on separately from the SFL.

If, after the startup and a visual inspection of the system, some lamps remain off, details on
ICCs & communication can be obtained through the ‘Status’ and ‘Flasher Data’ menus. This
will help to identify the cause of the problem.

ADB part number 1444.00.010 includes both the dongle, dongle cables and, software on a
CD. This dongle comes complete with its cables and a CD that contains the software.

See “Initial Software Installation and Software Use” on page 92 for additional details on use
of the software.
62
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
4.5.5.1 SFL including a RTIL
(Runway Threshold
Identification) system:
To include 2 REIL/RTIL flashing lamps in the Sequenced Flashing System, the two ICC
boards that will control the RTIL lamps must be defined.
•
Manual configuration
Physically the RTIL ICCs must be situated as the last units in the local bus
communication line if the system is configured manually. On the MCC Local Master PCB,
you must declare that a RTIL system is present. Put the SW bank 2 dip-switch 3 on the
Local Master PCB in the ON-position to do this. The ICCs connected to the RTIL lamps
must receive the two last slave numbers in the row. i.e., if a SFL with RTILS consists of 23
lights the RTIL lights will carry the slave numbers 22 & 23. The system will then
automatically know that the last two units in the communication line are defined as RTIL
lights. Therefore, they will both flash at the same time after the last light within the SFL
has flashed.
Flasher Configuration Software
4.5.5.2 REIL (Runway End
Identification) or RTIL only
system
•
Software configuration 
When the system is configured via the software through the dongle, any lamp in the
system can be declared as an RTIL light in a SFL. You just need to know the slave
number of the ICCs that you will want to operate as RTIL and set them in RTIL mode by
clicking the right field next to the corresponding ICC in the layout menu. The grey area will
then become red and show REIL1 or REIL2, see Figure 27. Through the software the
RTILS can be switched on/off independently from the SFL.
•
The flasher system can be used also as a REIL or RTIL without SFL. Only two lamps, 
2 ICCs & 1 MCC will be necessary in this configuration.
•
•
Same configuration as for the SFL incl. RTIL but with only two ICC slaves.
In both Software and manual configuration, the REILS (RTILS) must be defined.
NOTE: The RTILS can only be activated separately (without activation of the SFL) from the
Software or a J-Bus control if a SFL line is included in the system. (Not via a Multi-wire
control.)
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
63
Schematics
Parts
Operation
Installation Introduction
Controls
and Indicators
Figure 27:
Table of
Contents
4.5.5 Configuration of the
REIL/RTIL system
Disclaimer
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Controls and Indicators
Safety
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Controls and Indicators
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
4.5.6 Technical
Description of the Control
Cabinets, System
Components and
Available Options
Table of
Contents
4.5.6.1 Individual Control
Cabinets (ICC)
Each flasher requires one ICC (Individual Control Cabinet). There are 2 cabinet sizes:
•
•
A single ICC (ICC-1) controlling one lamp unit.
A multiple ICC with 3 units in one control unit (ICC-3) controlling three lamp units.
Safety
Introduction Installation
Controls
and Indicators
ICC -1
ICC -3
Any combination of these ICC cabinets is possible to obtain the required field configuration.
Note that the “ICC-3” has doubled terminals for a three-phase with neutral connection while
the “ICC -1” has only single-phase connection terminals.
The “ICC-1” requires a junction box to connect it to the power supply cable. See “ALSF
External Wiring Diagram, 400V Sequenced Flasher System- FAA ALSF/SSALR diagrams”
on page 2.
Operation
4.5.6.2 Master Control Cabinet
(MCC)
Each system requires one MCC (Master Control Cabinet). Each MCC contains a PCB that
generates the control signals to all the Individual Control Cabinets and connects the system
to the remote control system.
Remote control and back-indication signals are possible through +24 Vdc, +48 Vdc or 120
Vac Multi-wire cable.
4.5.6.3 Configuration
Parts
Configuration of the system can be done using Dip-switches or through a PC. The remote
control interface is factory set, depending on what has been ordered.
To modify the remote control parameters of a system you will require:
Schematics
•
•
•
4.5.6.4 Installation options
The dongle,
The software,
A PC with serial port (Windows Operating System).
The following installation options are available:
•
•
Additional over-voltage protection (max. 40kA, 8/20µs-pulse) on the input terminals.
External temperature sensor.
NOTE: Critical components of the ICC are protected against over-voltage with components
mounted on-board suitable for a typical environment usage.
The additional over-voltage protection option is recommended for areas where frequent
lightning occurs. The condition of the over-voltage protection can be monitored remotely.
64
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Operating Principle
This flashing system is based on a low voltage (400 Vdc) xenon-filled flashtube.
The wire around the flashtube serves to trigger the lamp by means of a voltage pulse of about
8 to 12kV between the trigger wire and the lamp anode.
•
•
See Figure 28. The flash energy is stored in a large capacitor C.
•
•
•
The capacitor C will start to discharge through the flash lamp.
•
•
•
The capacitor C is charged again by the voltage limited current source.
Table of
Contents
The trigger voltage pulse is delivered by a small trigger capacitor in the lamp trigger circuit
(located in the lamp unit) charged at 300 Vdc.
By means of a transistor Q, the capacitor voltage is quickly applied to the lamp. 
This generates the trigger pulse.
The current pulse will be limited by the series choke L.
Installation Introduction
Operating
Principle
As soon as the requested energy is supplied to the lamp, the transistor Q will be
deactivated (open). 
The remaining energy stored in the series choke will flow through the lamp and the diode
D.
The charge current will depend on the power consumed by the lamp.
The micro controller will select one out of 7 current levels to fully charge the capacitor
prior to the next flash instance.
Figure 28:
Flasher control
Flasher Control Logic
Lamp Unit
L
C
Lamp
Current
Control
D
Lamp
Trigger
Operation
Voltage
Limited
Current
Source
Safety
4.6 Operating
Principle
Disclaimer
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Schematics
Parts
Q
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
65
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Lightning Protection
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
4.7 Lightning
Protection
4.7.1 Flasher system
The flasher system is by definition installed outside in the field and is subject to lightning
strikes.
For this reason, the ICC cabinets come with built-in lightning protection.
Table of
Contents
All metal parts are interconnected and there are earth ground lugs for the customer’s use.
4.7.2 External wiring
In the external cabinet wiring, all cable shields must be connected to the cabinet earth
ground. This must be done for the cable to the lamp, the main supply and the local bus
connections.
Safety
Nevertheless, a major part of the efficiency of the protection is in the external wiring. All
necessary steps must be taken to insure a direct connection between the earth lug of the
cabinet and a solid local earth ground (counterpoise or at the very least a large section
grounding wire).
Introduction Installation
Lightning
Protection
As an option, each ICC -cabinet can be equipped with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistors) overvoltage protection on the main input. This will protect the cabinet if the lightning strikes
nearby. It is possible to check remotely (Modbus or Multi-wire) if the MOVs are still intact or
have to be replaced.
We recommend that the optional over-voltage protection be installed in any area where
lightning occurs frequently.
4.7.3 Local bus input
The local bus input is, at the input and the output level, protected by gas arresters (see Local
bus interface). Here too, the cable armor (shield) must be connected to a low-resistance
earth ground. On the flasher control unit (FCU) PCBs there is supplementary solid-state
protection that can absorb substantial amounts of energy injected as a result of a nearby
strike.
Operation
It must be stressed that although there can be no guarantee that there will be no damage
after a lightning strike, if the necessary precautions are taken, the damage will remain limited.
Parts
Schematics
66
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
4.8 ICC (Individual
Control Cabinet) FCU
PCB 1487
The flasher control unit is a CPU-controlled PCB that receives its input messages from the
MCC (or the dongle) via the local bus interface. There is no direct connection to the remote
control system.
The board contains a Switched Mode Power Supply (SMPS) to charge the flash energy
capacitor and has the necessary hardware to drive and monitor the lamp.
The PCB within the ICC counts the number of misfires and sends error messages back to the
MCC.
If the number of flashes exceeds the lamp lifetime, a message is sent to the system.
F1 - Fuse rated 2 AT, 5x20 mm.
Type
Purpose
Factory
wiring
P1
5-pin Stocko
Monitoring of the temperature
sensor
x
P2
3-pin Stocko
Monitoring of the door contact
x
P3
3-pin Stocko
Monitoring of the MOVS
x
P4
10-pin flat-cable
Local bus connector
x
P5
3-pin Wago
Heating resistor
x
P6
3-pin Wago
Mains supply
x
P7
3-pin Molex
Mains supply for the SMPS
x
J1
External
wiring
Safety
Name
Connectors
Remarks
Installation Introduction
ICC (Individual Control
Cabinet)
Table 22:
Caution: if the SMPS is not connected to this
board, there is a dummy plug on P7 to avoid
accidental contact with the mains supply.
SUBD9
Connector for the dongle
TB1
6-pin Phoenix
DC supply connection
x
TB2
6-pin Phoenix 
0.4-in (10.16 mm)
Lamp connection
TB3
Fast-on
Capacitor
x
WARNING: Insure the polarity blue or white,
and red wires are correct!
TB4
Fast-on
Coil
x
CAUTION: the terminal PE (Potential to Earth)
is never connected
x
Parameterization of the SFL
Return from the SMPS
x
Schematics
Parts
Operation
4.8.1 FCU PCB Fuse
Disclaimer
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ICC (Individual Control Cabinet) FCU PCB 1487
Table of
Contents
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
67
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ICC (Individual Control Cabinet) FCU PCB 1487
Disclaimer
4.8.1.1 Jumpers
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Jumpers are included on the PCBs to terminate the local bus, when necessary. During
installation and setup, they may have to be removed. See “Configuration” on page 56.
Jumpers are used in the following diagram to short out / or leave in, the 680 Ω and 150 Ω
resistors. Their function is described as follows.
Figure 29:
Table of
Contents
Jumper
680 Ω
Safety
Buss +
150 Ω
Introduction Installation
ICC (Individual Control
Cabinet)
Buss 680 Ω
Operation
•
The 150 Ω resistor is used to terminate the bus. It may only be installed at the physical
ends of the bus i.e., at the first and the last device physically found on the local bus
communication cable.
•
The 680 Ω resistors always come in pairs. There is a pull-up resistor on the positive bus
wire and an identical pull-down resistor on the negative wire. Their purpose is to polarize
the bus when no device is talking. After a message is sent by the MCC, but before an ICC
starts responding, the bus is polarized to a safe position by the internal high-value pullup/down resistors. Under extreme conditions of interference, additional 680 Ω resistors
can be installed to decrease the sensitivity of the bus. Note that the 680 Ω resistors may
only be connected at the LMC PCB and the last Individual Control Units (ICC) farthest
from the MCC in the system, otherwise the bus drivers will become overloaded.
Parts
Resistor 680 ohms
Jumper
Bus use
Pull up
Schematics
W11
W28
W25
Pull down
Terminating resistor
150 ohms
Notes
x
Local bus
x
x
Jumpers W11, W28 and W25 must be placed on both ends if the MCC is in the middle of the
ICCs.
68
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Setting
Use
Remarks
Flasher
Slave number of the MCC (local bus)
MUST BE UNIQUE for each ICC
SW2
Dip
xxxxxxxx
Valid value from 1 to 32 (binary code)
SW2 has eight dip switches.
Set as per chart to the right.
0=off and 1=on
SW1
Dip
OFF
2
OFF
3
OFF
4
OFF
5+
6
Internal use
Parts
1
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
#10
#11
#12
#13
#14
#15
#16
#17
#18
#19
#20
#21
#22
#23
#24
#25
#26
#27
#28
#29
#30
#31
#32
SW2- SW2- SW2- SW2- SW2- SW2- SW2- SW21
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
•
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
•
o
o
o
o
o
o
•
•
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
•
o
o
o
o
o
•
o
•
o
o
o
o
o
o
•
•
o
o
o
o
o
•
•
•
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
•
o
o
o
o
•
o
o
•
o
o
o
o
o
•
o
•
o
o
o
o
•
•
o
•
o
o
o
o
o
o
•
•
o
o
o
o
•
o
•
•
o
o
o
o
o
•
•
•
o
o
o
o
•
•
•
•
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
•
o
o
o
•
o
o
o
•
o
o
o
o
•
o
o
•
o
o
o
•
•
o
o
•
o
o
o
o
o
•
o
•
o
o
o
•
o
•
o
•
o
o
o
o
•
•
o
•
o
o
o
•
•
•
o
•
o
o
o
o
o
o
•
•
o
o
o
•
o
o
•
•
o
o
o
o
•
o
•
•
o
o
o
•
•
o
•
•
o
o
o
o
o
•
•
•
o
o
o
•
o
•
•
•
o
o
o
o
•
•
•
•
o
o
o
•
•
•
•
•
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
•
o
o
Table of
Contents
Switch-bank Type
Safety
CAUTION
If a switch setting is changed, it will only be taken into account after the next power down cycle, i.e. power down the
system in order to make a change in the hardware setting effective.
OFF
OFF Baud rate local bus 9600 baud
ON
OFF Baud rate local bus 19200 baud
OFF
ON
Baud rate local bus 38400 baud
ON
ON
Invalid
7+
8
OFF
OFF No parity
ON
OFF Invalid (no parity)
OFF
ON
Local bus Odd parity
ON
ON
Local bus Even parity
Schematics
•
There are two Dip-switch banks on the FCU PCB that are used to configure the ICC and thus
pre-install some parameters.
Installation Introduction
ICC (Individual Control
Cabinet)
4.8.1.2 Dip-switches
Disclaimer
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ICC (Individual Control Cabinet) FCU PCB 1487
Operation
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Factory Setting
Factory Setting
NOTE: The baud rate and parity of the local bus should only be changed if you experience
severe problems in communication between the units. In this case ALL the units should be
set to the same baud rate and parity!
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
69
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ICC (Individual Control Cabinet) FCU PCB 1487
Disclaimer
Figure 30:
SW1
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
FCU PCB 1487: Switchbanks and Jumpers
SW2
Jumper W11
Table of
Contents
Jumper W25
Safety
Jumper W28
4.8.1.3 LEDs
The ICC is equipped with a number of LEDs. Their function is shown below.
Table 23:
Introduction Installation
ICC (Individual Control
Cabinet)
Name
Indication
Status
Operation
DS1
FLASH command
Duration is proportional to
the selected step.
DS2
RUN
1 Flash per second
DS3
Rx local bus
DS4
Tx local bus
Normally OFF
Lights up momentarily
during transmission or
reception.
DS5
Isolated supply local bus ON
DS6
FLASH
ON during flash request
Remarks
Higher rate during software upload
If one of these LEDs is OFF, there is
no traffic on the corresponding bus.
If one of these LEDs is ON, there is
may be, a polarity inversion on the
bus.
Hardware flash command to IGBT
Driver
Parts
Schematics
70
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
This is a small PCB mounted on the DIN rail that provides the interconnection of the local bus
between the ICC cabinets.
The PCB is equipped with gas arrestors for over-voltage protection.
For ease of wiring, there are 2 connectors for the local bus P1 and P3.
The other for the connection to the preceding ICC cabinet’s PCB 1498 P3 (output).
Local Bus interface, PCB 1498
P2
P4
P1
P3
The MCC Local Master PCB provides the control for the complete system.
Three modes of control exist:
•
•
•
Operation
4.10 MCC (Local
Master) PCB 1485
Installation Introduction
Local Bus
Interface
PCB 1498
Figure 31:
Safety
The external local bus connection from the MCC P3 is connected to P1 in the first ICC,
and then P3 of that cabinet is connected to P1 in the next ICC, and so on. See the
external connection diagram in section 9. 
The flat-cable connectors P2 and P4 are for internal distribution of the bus signal, and are
factory wired.
Remote control
Local control
Control via the Dongle
The Local Master PCB is a CPU-controlled printed circuit board. It interfaces with the remote
control system that provides the command and back-indication signal functions. The MCC is
not only the unique connection point for the customer’s remote control system, it is also the
device that maintains a continuous communication with all the ICCs under its command. All
the data received is collected into a single database that gives the user a quick overview of
the system without having to scan all separate ICC PCBs. Full information on the individual
ICCs can also be found in the data-base. 
Data on the system can only be obtained using a PC and a Dongle.
The data exchange between the MCC and the individual ICCs is achieved over a twisted pair
RS-485, 3 wire connection. This communication link is called the “local bus” connection. See
also Chapter 4 “local bus Interface, PCB1498”. The protocol is proprietary.
The rotary switch in the MCC connects to the Local Master PCB to provide Local and Remote
control functions.
On the Local Master PCB, there is a rotary selector switch SW3. It is normally not used and is
set to position 9. If the MCC cabinet rotary switch is not present, it can optionally be used to
select either remote control (position 9) or local control (position 1, 2 and 3 according to the
brightness setting required).
The dongle is connected to the system using either the MCC or any ICC. When configuring
the system using a PC, the MCC loses the master command over the local bus and the
software is used to define the control and configuration of the system. At that moment the
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Table of
Contents
One is for the connection to the next cabinet’s PCB 1498 P1 (input),
71
Parts
•
•
•
Schematics
4.9 Local Bus
Interface PCB 1498
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Local Bus Interface PCB 1498
Disclaimer
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MCC (Local Master) PCB 1485
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Multi-wire and the busses also lose control over the system. All settings and control
parameters are set via the software.
NOTE: For FAA MALSR applications, all settings and control parameters can be set using
only the DIP switches.
Table of
Contents
4.10.1 Protections
All the bus signals (local bus and the optional Modbus) are protected with solid-state devices
against over-voltages (lightning strike). They are galvanically isolated from the LMC and FCU
PCB signals to better absorb sudden surges on the bus.
4.10.2 Start-up and
scanning
At power-up the MCC reads its local E²PROM memory to find the system configuration. Then
it will contact all the system’s ICC PCBs via the local bus. System configuration data is sent to
each ICC to program it for normal operation.
Safety
Depending on how the system was configured it will read the configuration from the dipswitches or the E²PROM.
After the start-up sequence, the MCC continues to scan all the ICCs sequentially to ensure
correct operation. If REIL flashers are used, they are scanned at a higher rate for applications
where it is required to switch one OFF if the other fails (misfires).
Introduction Installation
MCC (Local
Master) PCB
1485
Supplementary messages are interleaved with this scan cycle when commands are received
from Local or Remote control.
4.10.3 Synchronization
The main purpose of a flasher system is that each unit flashes in a predefined sequence,
interval and repetition rate.
Each ICC is an autonomous device that decides for itself when it is to flash. This is based on
2 parameters: the cycle time and the sequence time.
The cycle time defines the repetition rate. It can be programmed to:
Operation
•
•
•
2 flashes per second (FAA and ICAO standard),
1 flash per second,
1 flash every 2, 5 or 10 seconds.
The sequence time is the delay counted from the beginning of a cycle that defines the
moment a lamp must flash.
Parts
One of the functions of the MCC is to keep all the ICCs synchronized so that they will flash in
sequence. This is accomplished by sending a unique message to all the ICCs at regular
intervals. This guarantees the system will keep the flashing sequence within a few
milliseconds.
Schematics
The CPU on each FCU PCB generates an internal clock with a precision that depends
directly on the internal quartz crystal (100 ppm, i.e. 0.001%). This clock is the reference time
base for all the internal timers. In order to achieve a continuous 1 msec precision on the
flashing timing, a re-synchronizing message is sent by the MCC once every 10 seconds. This
corrects for any drift in the clock frequency.
4.10.4 Real-time
measurements
The MCC is also the controller for the real-time measurement. This allows the user to check if
each ICC flashes at the expected moment.
The real-time measurement only runs on request by the user and for a limited time that the
user can select (min 5 sec to max 60 sec). During this time, the MCC captures and stores the
exact moment when each lamp flashes.
During real-time measurement, the synchronizing messages are suspended. This allows the
user to check for possible timing drift of each ICC.
After the measurement terminates, the captured data is available in the data base.
72
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MCC (Local Master) PCB 1485
To be connected by
customer
Purpose
Factory
connections
Remarks
P1
20-pin flat cable
External Modbus
P2
10-pin flat cable
P3
10-pin flat cable
Local bus 
(coming from the 
closest ICC)
P4
6-pin Phoenix
Mains supply
P5
26-pin flat cable
Supply for multi-wire control
P6
3-pin Stocko
Monitoring for the MOVs
x
P7
3-pin Stocko
Monitoring for the door contact
x
P8
5-pin Stocko
Monitoring for the temperature
sensor probe
x
P9
5-pin Stocko
Monitoring for the door contact
J1
3-pin Wago
Mains supply of the Multi-wire
Not used
J2
SUBD9
Connection of the dongle
Sets the Parameters of the
sequenced flashing lights
(SFL)
J3
3-pin Wago
Synchronization between
MCCs
Not used
J4
3-pin Wago
Mains supply
Not used
J5
3-pin Wago
Heating resistor
6-pin Phoenix
DC supply
TB1
Disclaimer
Type
x
x
Alternative to P2
Table of
Contents
Name
PCB 1485 Connectors
Not used
Safety
x
Installation Introduction
MCC (Local
Master) PCB
1485
Table 24:
Not used
x
4.10.5 PCB 1485 Jumpers
Resistor 680 ohms
Bus use
Rx : Tx
Pull up
W1
W2
Remote Bus A
Tx Tx +
W3
Tx
W4
Rx +
W5
Rx -
W6
Rx
W7
Rx -
W8
Tx
W9
W10
Remote Bus B
Tx +
W11
R x+
W12
Rx
W13
W14
W15
W16
Reserved
Local bus jumpers
x
x
not used
not used
x
not used
x
x
not used
not used
x
x
not used
not used
x
not used
x
not used
x
x
not used
for future use
x
+
not used
x
+
not used
x
Tx -
Remarks
Pull down
x
x
W17
Synchronization line
x
W18
Local bus jumper
x
W19
Bus A
not used
W20
Bus B
not used
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Parts
Jumper
Terminating resistor
150 ohms
Operation
PCB 1485 Jumpers
Schematics
Table 25:
for future use
73
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MCC (Local Master) PCB 1485
Disclaimer
4.10.6 Rotary and Dipswitches
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
There are a number of dip-switches on this PCB that are used to configure it, to set some
parameters or to reset completely the MCC.
NOTE: Except where specifically noted, all the switches are read at power-up. If a switch
setting is changed, it will only be taken into account after the next power-down/power-up
cycle.
Figure 32:
MCC, PCB1485: Switches
Table of
Contents
SW 5
SW 3
SW 4
Safety
SW 2
SW 1
Introduction Installation
MCC (Local
Master) PCB
1485
Table 26:
PCB 1485 Rotary and dip-switches
Switchbank
Type
SW1
Dip
SW2
Dip
Setting
xxxxxxxx
OFF
OFF
16 msec interval time
ON
OFF
33 msec interval time
OFF
ON
66 msec interval time
ON
ON
invalid
3
ON
Declaration of REILS
ON
1 cycle per second
OFF
2 cycles per second
Operation
Rotary
Parts
0
Flasher system OFF
1
Step 1
2
Step 2
3
Step 3
9
Remote control
Schematics
OFF
Enabling of the control
by the rotary SW3
Manual config SW4 /4
Set to position 9 for both FAA MALSR
and ALSF applications using a master
control cabinet (MCC).
ON
Hardware local kill ON No control by SW3
2
OFF
See note 1
3
OFF
See note 2
OFF
Configuration by use of
the dongle
ON
Manual config by SW2 NOTE: Manual Configuration not
and SW5
available on ALSF/SSALR applications
4
74
not used
2
1
SW4
Remarks
1+
4
SW3
Use
Dip
5+
6
OFF
OFF
Baud rate local bus
9600 baud
ON
OFF
Baud rate local bus
19200 baud
OFF
ON
Baud rate local bus
38400 baud
Factory settings
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MCC (Local Master) PCB 1485
Setting
SW4
Dip
ON
invalid
7+
8
OFF
OFF
No parity
ON
OFF
Invalid (no parity)
OFF
ON
Local bus Odd parity
ON
ON
Local bus Even parity
7
Dip
Factory settings
Number of ICCs in the
See Table 27
system
1 >6
SW5
Remarks
Table of
Contents
ON
Use
Not used
OFF
Disabling of the use of
the dongle
ON
Enabling of the use of
the dongle
8
Safety
Type
CAUTION
SW4/2 - Initiation of the data E²PROM
The MCC stores the system parameters in an E²PROM. When first powered-up or when the system must
be completely reconfigured, it is possible to clear the E²PROM and return to the default factory settings.
To do this, put the switch in the ON position, power down the MCC and turn it ON again after 5 seconds.
Do not forget to set the switch back to OFF or the E²PROM will once again be cleared at the next power
cycle.
This will clear all the parameters, including the system layout data. The system parameters must be
restored via the software, or by using the dip-switches.
NOTE: SW4/3 - Lock to boot 
This switch is always OFF in a functioning system. It is only used if there is a major problem
during upload of new application code.
SW5 dip switch
Operation
Table 27:
Schematics
Parts
Flasher SW2-1 SW2-2 SW2-3 SW2-4 SW2-5 SW2-6 SW2-7 SW2-8
#1
•
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
#2
o
•
o
o
o
o
o
o
#3
•
•
o
o
o
o
o
o
•
o
o
o
o
o
#4
o
o
#5
•
o
•
o
o
o
o
o
#6
o
•
•
o
o
o
o
o
•
•
•
o
o
o
o
o
#7
#8
o
o
o
•
o
o
o
o
#9
•
o
o
•
o
o
o
o
#10
o
•
o
•
o
o
o
o
#11
•
•
o
•
o
o
o
o
#12
o
o
•
•
o
o
o
o
#13
•
o
•
•
o
o
o
o
#14
o
•
•
•
o
o
o
o
#15
•
•
•
•
o
o
o
o
#16
o
o
o
o
•
o
o
o
#17
•
o
o
o
•
o
o
o
#18
o
•
o
o
•
o
o
o
#19
•
•
o
o
•
o
o
o
#20
o
o
•
o
•
o
o
o
#21
•
o
•
o
•
o
o
o
#22
o
•
•
o
•
o
o
o
#23
•
•
•
o
•
o
o
o
#24
o
o
o
•
•
o
o
o
#25
•
o
o
•
•
o
o
o
#26
o
•
o
•
•
o
o
o
#27
•
•
o
•
•
o
o
o
#28
o
o
•
•
•
o
o
o
#29
•
o
•
•
•
o
o
o
#30
o
•
•
•
•
o
o
o
#31
•
•
•
•
•
o
o
o
#32
o
o
o
o
o
•
o
o
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Installation Introduction
MCC (Local
Master) PCB
1485
Switchbank
Disclaimer
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
75
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MCC (Local Master) PCB 1485
Disclaimer
4.10.7 LEDs
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
The MCC is equipped with a number of LEDs. Their function is described in the table below.
Table 28:
Name
Indication
Table of
Contents
DS1
Isolated supply Bus A
DS2
Isolated supply Bus B
DS3
Isolated supply local bus
DS4
Reserved
DS5
RUN
DS6
Rx local bus
DS7
Status
Remarks
ON
For future use
Safety
1 flash per second
Higher rate during software upload
Tx local bus
Normally OFF.
DS8
Rx Bus A
If one of these LEDs is OFF, there is
no traffic on the corresponding bus.
DS9
Tx Bus A
DS10
Rx Bus B
DS11
Tx Bus B
Lights up momentarily
during transmission or
If one of these LEDs stays ON, there
reception.
may be a polarity inversion on the bus.
Introduction Installation
MCC (Local
Master) PCB
1485
Operation
Parts
Schematics
76
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
It provides a simple remote control system via relays and also provides galvanic isolation
between the remote control system and the flashing system. The Multi-wire is connected to
the MCC by a flat cable on connector P3. Its presence is detected automatically.
In case the internal power supply is not used (external remote control power supply is
available) there is no need to connect this PCB to the mains supply (plug J1).
The user can also use the internal power supply to interface to the remote control system.
This power supply is short-circuit protected by self-repairing poly-switches. The maximum
current is 200 mA for 48 V and 400 mA for 24 V. If the remote control is 120 Vac, separately
mounted 120 Vac relays feed the input of the multi-wire PCB.
The Multi-wire interface exists in 2 versions: 24 Vdc (part number 1593.13.510) and 48 Vdc
(1593.13.520).
Installation Introduction
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
4.11.1 Control signals and
back-indication
The relays are DC, but are not polarized, i.e. the control can be inverted.
The back-indications signals are provided over dry contact relays.
Figure 33:
Disclaimer
The Multi-wire interface (in the MCC) is a simple device with 8 command (input) terminals
(connectors P2) and up to 8 back-indication (output) terminals (connector P1). For 120 Vac
remote control applications, there are multiple back indicators available. Separate relays are
used for the back indication.
Table of
Contents
4.11 Multi-wire
Remote Control and
Monitoring Interface
PCB 1486
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
Safety
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
ALSF I/O settings: Click on I/O TAB
Operation
Click on IO
Tab
Click on Mode tab and click on Mode 2 SSALR
Schematics
Figure 34:
Parts
Make changes by clicking
here
Click on
Mode Tab
Click on Mode2
SSALR
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
77
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
Disclaimer
4.11.2 FCU Multi-wire I/O
Configuration for the FAA
Market
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
4.11.2.1 Functions
Table 29:
Name
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Multi-wire Signals
Type
Function
Mode Select Bit 0 Output
This signal shows the value of mode select bit 0. This signal allows the
upper system to know what mode the FCU was commanded to.
Mode Select Bit 1 Output
This signal shows the value of mode select bit 1. This signal allows the
upper system to know what mode the FCU was commanded to.
Step 1
Output
This signal is made HIGH if the system was COMMANDED to step 1.
Step 2
Output
This signal is made HIGH if the system was COMMANDED to step 2.
Step 3
Output
This signal is made HIGH if the system was COMMANDED to step 3.
Local
Output
This signal is made HIGH when the local control selector switch is NOT in
the remote position. Combined with the step signals above and the
running signal, this allows the upper system to know what the locally
commanded conditions are.
CAUTION
Output
This signal is made HIGH when CAUTION condition exists for the FCU in
the currently COMMANDED mode.
FAULT
Output
This signal is made HIGH when FAULT condition exists for the FCU in the
currently COMMANDED mode.
Explicit ON
Input
This signal is made HIGH by the upper system to command the FCU to
switch on. Normally, the FCU will switch on as soon as an intensity is
given. If the explicit on signal is present, both an “intensity” and the
“explicit on” signal must be HIGH for the FCU to switch on.
The function of each input terminal is determined in the software.
There are two possibilities:
Operation
•
Manual Configuration
For systems that utilize remote control without use of the Modbus, there is an alternative
way to configure the system without the use of the dongle and the software.
First the switch SW4/4 of the Local Master PCB must be set to ON to select manual
configuration.
The system is configured using the dip-switches. Only the Multi-wire remote control and
back-indication are available. See Table 26.
•
Configuration by use of the dongle and the software (Windows I/O).
I/Os can be defined by means of the flasher software and dongle.
Parts
Schematics
78
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
This connector is only directly used via interface relays mounted in the MCC for 24 Vdc, 
48 Vdc or 120 Vac remote control signals.
Disclaimer
4.11.2.2 Input connector P2:
remote control command
signals
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
The connector type is WAGO 231-312/026-000 cage-clamp connector 
(part number 6112.33.112). See “Schematics” on page 131.
Command signals on connector P2 are:
PCB 1486 Input functions
Step 1
Step 2
Description
If one of the contacts is activated, the ICCs switch
ON at the selected step. If nothing is activated, the
ICC goes OFF.
Manual config assignation
Terminal IN 1
Terminal IN 2
Step 3
Note that if more than 1 terminal is activated
simultaneously, the flasher highest step takes
precedence.
REILS ON
When activated, this switches the REILS ON at the
Terminal IN 4
step defined above.
Reset misfire
If there was a latched misfire condition, activating
this terminal clears it.
Terminal IN 8
Free
These terminals are not used.
Terminals IN 5, IN 6, IN 7
Terminal IN 3
Safety
Function
Installation Introduction
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
Table 30:
It is possible to select one of the first 4 modes via
the Multi-wire.
Mode Select Bit 0
By default mode 1 is used.
Not used
If only the mode select bit 0 is attributed to a
terminal, it selects mode 
0 (OFF) or 1 (ON).
If both functions are attributed to 2 terminals, then
modes 2 and 3 can also be selected.
Bit 0 - Bit 1
•
•
•
•
Not used
Operation
Mode Select Bit 1
Table of
Contents
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
OFF - OFF - Use mode 1
ON - OFF - Use mode 2
OFF - ON - Use mode 3
ON - ON - Use mode 4
Schematics
Parts
NOTE: The control commands may use an external DC supply (polarity: any) 
or an internal DC supply (positive or negative: see drawings.)
Mode selection: ALSF1 / SSALR / MALSR / ALSF2.....
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
79
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
Disclaimer
4.11.2.3 Modes of operation
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
The control commands may use an external DC supply (polarity: any) or an internal DC
supply (positive or negative: see drawings).
Figure 35:
External supply 24 Vdc or 48 Vdc: Polarity=either.
Table of
Contents
Safety
Terminal
P2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
Common
9
Introduction Installation
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
V ext +
10
Ground ext
11
PE
12
Figure 36:
Internal power supply 48 Vdc or 24 Vdc Polarity=positive
Operation
Terminal
P2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
Common
9
Parts
V ext +
10
Ground ext
11
PE
12
Supply from the MW Switch 
in V ext + conductor
Schematics
Install jumper W5 to connect the common (9) to GND
ext (11)
80
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
Common
9
V ext +
10
Ground ext
11
PE
12
Supply from the MW Switch 
in GND ext - conductor
Table of
Contents
P2
Safety
Terminal
Disclaimer
Internal power supply 48 Vdc or 24 Vdc Polarity=negative
Remove jumper W5.
Connect a jumper to terminals 
9 and 10.
NOTE: For FAA MALSR and ALSF applications using 120 Vac remote control, both jumpers
W5 and W6 are removed.
4.11.2.4 Output functions
Connector P1 is used for the back-indication signals.
The connector type is WAGO 231-312/026-000 cage-clamp connector (part number
6112.33.112). This connector can accept wires of 0,08 to 2,5 mm² (28 – 12 AWG).
Installation Introduction
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
Figure 37:
Back-indication signals are:
Misfire on 1 ICC
released
Misfire on at least 2
ICCs
released
Misfire on 2 consecutive
ICCs
released
Misfire on 1 ICC
latched
Misfire on at least 2
ICCs
latched
Misfire on 2 consecutive
ICCs
latched
Misfire limit reached
Lamp Life limit reached
REILS DOWN
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Description
Manual configuration
setting
Not used
The terminal contacts are activated
when a misfire occurs and are
released at the next correct flash.
Not used
Parts
Condition
Not used
These terminal contacts are activated
when the error occurs and remain
active until the Reset Misfire contact
is activated.
Terminal OUT 1
Schematics
Function
Operation
Wiring: see “Schematics” on page 131.
Terminal OUT 2
Terminal OUT 3
latched
This terminal is activated if the
number of misfires exceeds the limit
on at least one ICC. The condition is
cleared by activating the reset misfire
function.
Not used
latched
This terminal is activated if the
number of flashes exceeds the lamp
life time on at least 1 ICC. The
condition is cleared by activating the
reset misfire function.
Not used
If there is a misfire on 1 of the REIL
ICCs and the other one is switched
OFF automatically, then this terminal
is activated.
Terminal OUT 4
81
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Description
Manual configuration
setting
Overtemperature
When the inside temperature of an
ICC or the MCC exceeds the
programmed maximum temperature,
this terminal is activated. As soon as
the temperature drops under the limit
on all the devices, the terminal resets.
Terminal OUT 5
Communication
problems on local bus
If the MCC cannot contact one of the
ICCs this terminal is activated. As
soon as the condition is repaired and
the ICC is back on line, the terminal
resets.
Terminal OUT 6
Function
Condition
Table of
Contents
Safety
The security parameters check for
defects in the protection of the
Control units (MOV) or intrusion
(DOOR open or flasher fixture open).
As soon as the condition is repaired
or the door/fixture is closed, the
terminal resets. MOV monitoring is
available only with the higher rated
ICC lightning protection option.
Security (DOOR open +
MOV blown)
Security (DOOR open)
Introduction Installation
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
Security (MOV blown)
Free
This terminal is not used.
Contact is closed when the flasher
system received a valid step + mode
command.
Flasher RUNNING
4.11.2.5 Back-indication Modes
of operation
Terminal OUT 7
Not used
Not used
Terminal OUT 8
Not used
The back-indication signals may be provided:
•
•
Over dry contact relays
Over polarized contacts (positive or negative)
Operation
See drawings below for 24 Vdc or 48 Vdc applications:
Figure 38:
Parts
Schematics
82
Dry contacts:
Terminal
P1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
Common
9
V ext +
10
Ground ext
11
PE
12
Supply by user: max 110 Vdc, polarity: any
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
Common
9
V ext +
10
Ground ext
11
PE
12
Supply from the Multi-wire load in 
GND ext - conductor
Table of
Contents
P2
Safety
Terminal
Disclaimer
Polarized contact negative
Installation Introduction
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
Figure 39:
Install jumper W6 to connect the common to V ext +.
Polarized contact positive
P2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
Common
9
V ext +
10
Ground ext
11
PE
12
Supply from the Multi-wire load in V ext + conductor
Operation
Terminal
Parts
Figure 40:
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Schematics
Remove jumper W6
Connect a jumper to terminals 
9 and 10.
83
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
4.11.3 Manual
Configurations Overview
The following is an overview on how to set the jumpers and switches.
4.11.3.1 Configuring the 400V
MALSR 5-Light Sequenced
Flasher System
Local Master Control (LMC) Board
NOTE: Manual configuration is not available on ALSF systems.
— SW1: Not used
— SW2: 1=ON; 2=OFF; 3=OFF; 4=OFF
Table of
Contents
— Rotary switch SW3: Always set to position 9
— SW4:1=OFF; 2=OFF; 3=OFF; 4=OFF; 5=OFF; 6=ON; 7=ON; 8=ON
Safety
NOTE: 1 to 6 represents the total number of flashers in the system. (This means the
binary value is the same as SW2 from the last FCU PCB in the system).

S4-4 is normally set to ON to enable automatic configuration by the dipswitch settings.
It is set to OFF when connecting the laptop.
— SW5: 1=ON/OFF; 2=ON/OFF; 3=ON/OFF; 4=ON/OFF; 5=ON/OFF; 6=ON/OFF;
7=OFF; 8=ON
Introduction Installation
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
Configuring the Jumpers
— Jumpers W15, W16 and W18: Insure that these jumpers are present.
— All other jumpers (W1-W14, W17, W19, W20, W32): Not used. If a jumper is present it
can remain in place.
Figure 41:
Manual Configuration Jumpers and Switches
Jumper
Jumper W15
W15
Jumpers
Jumpers W1-W14,
W1-W14, W17,
W17, W19,
W19, W20
W20
Jumper
Jumper W16
W16
Jumper
Jumper W18
W18
Operation
Parts
Schematics
Jumper
Jumper W32
W32
SW1
SW3
SW4
Local Master Control (LMC) Board LEDs
84
SW5
SW2
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
Table of
Contents
DS1
DS1
Green
Green
ON
ON == Supply
Supply Bus
Bus A
A OK
OK
DS3,
DS3, Green
Green
ON
ON == Local
Local Bus
Bus
Supply
Supply OK
OK
DS2,
DS2, Green
Green
ON
ON == Supply
Supply Bus
Bus B
B OK
OK
Safety
Sync
Sync LED
LED
DS4,
DS4, Green
Green
Normally
Normally ON
ON
Blinks
Blinks briefly
briefly
once
once every
every 10
10
sec.
sec.
LMC LED Indications
Disclaimer
Figure 42:
Installation Introduction
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
RUN
RUN LED
LED
DS5,
DS5, Green
Green
11 flash/sec.
flash/sec. ==
microprocessor
microprocessor
running
running OK
OK
Rx
Rx Local
Local Bus
Bus LED
LED
DS6,
DS6, Green
Green
Lights
Lights
momentarily
momentarily
during
during reception
reception
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Parts
Tx
Tx Bus
Bus B
B LED
LED
DS11,
DS11, Green
Green
Lights
Lights
momentarily
momentarily
during
during
transmission
transmission
(OFF
(OFF ifif Bus
Bus B
B
not
not used)
used)
Rx
Rx Bus
Bus B
B LED
LED
DS10,
DS10, Green
Green
Lights
Lights
momentarily
momentarily
during
during reception
reception
(OFF
(OFF ifif Bus
Bus B
B not
not
used)
used)
Schematics
Tx
Tx Bus
Bus A
A LED
LED
DS9,
DS9, Green
Green
Lights
Lights
momentarily
momentarily
during
during
transmission
transmission
(OFF
(OFF ifif Bus
Bus A
A not
not
used)
used)
Operation
Rx
Rx Bus
Bus A
A LED
LED
DS8,
DS8, Green
Green
Lights
Lights
momentarily
momentarily
during
during
reception
reception
(OFF
(OFF ifif Bus
Bus A
A
not
not used)
used)
Tx
Tx Local
Local Bus
Bus LED
LED
DS7,
DS7, Green
Green
Lights
Lights
momentarily
momentarily
during
during
transmission
transmission
85
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
Disclaimer
4.11.3.2 Configuring the
Jumpers of the Multi-Wire
Board
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Jumpers W5 and W6: Insure that neither jumper is present. Remove them if present.
Figure 43:
Multi-Wire Board
Table of
Contents
Jumper
Jumper W5
W5
Safety
Jumper
Jumper W6
W6
Introduction Installation
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
NOTE: Use jumpers W5 and W6 if an internal power supply is used. See Table 31.
Depending on the remote control system Multiwire and/or J-bus modules are installed next to
the LMC PCB.
Operation
Parts
Schematics
86
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
There are two different Multiwire PCB’s
Disclaimer
4.11.3.3 Multiwire
— Multiwire board 1593.13510 for 24Vdc signals
— Multiwire board 1593.13520 for 48Vdc signals
Different connection possibilities:
— External power supply
Back
indication
Internal power supply
Internal power supply
(polarized contacts positive)
(polarized contacts negative)
Remove strap W6
Remove strap W6
Install strap W6
External power supply
Internal power supply
Internal power supply
24Vdc/48Vdc
(switch in + conductor)
(switch in -conductor)
Remove strap W5
Install strap W5
Remove strap W5
(polarity is not important)
Max. 110Vdc
Control signal
Schematics
Remarks
Parts
Operation
Installation Introduction
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
Remarks
Multiwire Configurations
Safety
Table 31:
External power supply
Table of
Contents
— Internal power supply
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
87
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
Disclaimer
4.11.3.4 Flasher Controller Unit
(FCU) Board
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Configuring the Dip-switches 
(example of 5-light MALSR)
SW1: 1=OFF; 2=OFF; 3=OFF; 4=OFF; 5=OFF; 6=ON; 7=ON; 8=ON.
SW2 Flasher #1: 1=ON; 2=OFF; 3=OFF; 4=OFF; 5=OFF; 6=OFF; 7=OFF; 8=OFF.
SW2 Flasher #2: 1=OFF; 2=ON; 3=OFF; 4=OFF; 5=OFF; 6=OFF; 7=OFF; 8=OFF.
Table of
Contents
SW2 Flasher #3: 1=ON; 2=ON; 3=OFF; 4=OFF; 5=OFF; 6=OFF; 7=OFF; 8=OFF.
SW2 Flasher #4: 1=OFF; 2=OFF; 3=ON; 4=OFF; 5=OFF; 6=OFF; 7=OFF; 8=OFF.
SW2 Flasher #5: 1=ON; 2=OFF; 3=ON; 4=OFF; 5=OFF; 6=OFF; 7=OFF; 8=OFF.
NOTE: Flasher Number 1 is the flasher farthest from the runway.
Safety
4.11.3.5 Configuring the
Jumpers
Remove jumpers W11, W25 & W28 on all FCUs but the FCU farthest from the Master Control
Cabinet (MCC). As an example of 5-light MALSR with the MCC closest to Flasher #5, the
jumper settings would be:
Introduction Installation
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
— W11, W25 & W28 Flasher #1: All 3 jumpers present. Note: Flasher Number 1 is the
flasher farthest from the runway.
— W11, W25 & W28 Flasher #2: All 3 jumpers removed.
— W11, W25 & W28 Flasher #3: All 3 jumpers removed.
— W11, W25 & W28 Flasher #4: All 3 jumpers removed.
— W11, W25 & W28 Flasher #5: All 3 jumpers removed.
NOTE: Flasher Number 5 is the flasher closest to the runway.
Figure 44:
SW1
Flasher Control Unit (FCU) Board Jumpers and Switches
SW2
Operation
Jumper
Jumper W11
W11
Parts
Schematics
Jumper
Jumper W25
W25
Jumper
Jumper W28
W28
NOTE: Jumpers W11, W25 and W28 must be placed on both ICC ends if the Master is in the
middle.
88
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Figure 45:
Rx
Rx Local
Local Bus
Bus LED
LED
DS3,
DS3, Green
Green
Lights
Lights momentarily
momentarily during
during reception
reception
Tx
Tx Local
Local Bus
Bus
LED
LED
DS4,
DS4, Green
Green
Lights
Lights
momentarily
momentarily
during
during
transmission
transmission
Safety
FLASH
FLASH COMMAND
COMMAND LED
LED
DS1,
DS1, Green
Green
Flashes
Flashes twice
twice per
per second
second
ON
ON duration
duration proportional
proportional to
to
selected
selected step
step
Flasher Control Unit (FCU) Board LED Indicators
Disclaimer
4.11.3.6 Flasher Control Unit
(FCU) Board LEDs
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
Table of
Contents
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
The external temperature probe can be attached to any of the ICC cabinets.
The local master control (LMC) PCB interprets the data received from the external
temperature probe connected to P8.
Parts
4.11.4 External
Temperature Probe
DS5,
DS5, Green
Green
ON
ON == Local
Local
Bus
Bus Supply
Supply
OK
OK
Operation
FLASH
FLASH LED
LED
DS6,
DS6, Green
Green
Flashes
Flashes 2/sec.
2/sec.
ON
ON during
during
flash
flash request
request
to
to IGBT
IGBT driver
driver
Installation Introduction
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
RUN
RUN LED
LED
DS2,
DS2, Green
Green
11 flash/sec.
flash/sec. ==
microprocessor
microprocessor
running
running OK
OK
This temperature reading is used for the system to control the anti condensation heating
resistors.
External Temperature Probe
Schematics
Figure 46:
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
89
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
Disclaimer
4.11.5 Dongle
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
The dongle comes with all interconnection cables and a CD-ROM with the latest software
version. This software has been tested to function correctly with Windows NT / Windows 95/
Windows 98/ Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7 (32 bit).
NOTE: Windows™ is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Table of
Contents
The dongle, which is a small PCB, is the interface between the flasher system and a PC
running the flasher configuration program under one of the Window™ versions listed above.
For FAA applications, it is normally used for the flasher tester function. It can optionally be
used to adjust system parameters.
It connects on one side to any of the ICCs or the MCC and on the other side to a COM (RS232) port of a PC or laptop that has the flasher software installed.
Safety
When the dongle is connected between the system and a laptop running the flasher software,
the Local Master PCB bus is deactivated.
The dongle collects all the necessary data from the MCC and the individual ICCs.
Introduction Installation
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
NOTE: If the MCC is down or if the dongle control has not been enabled by means of the dipswitches (see Table 26), the dongle will not take over control of the system. An error
message will appear in the Flasher Software window to indicate this.
The dongle derives its power from the device to which it is connected (ICC or MCC).
The dongle provides the synchronization messages instead of the Local Master PCB.
CAUTION
During transfer of control, there can be anomalous timings on the ICCs, i.e. there
can be an aborted cycle or the random triggering of a lamp. This is due to the
differences in timing between the Local Master PCB bus and the dongle.
DO NOT start-up the dongle and the laptop connection while the flasher system
is in use.
Operation
Real time measurements are possible through the dongle. The results are
analysed and shown on the screen of the PC.
4.11.5.1 LEDs
It is necessary to set the switches SW4/4 and SW5/8 on the Local Master PCB to
enable control and configuration with the PC using the dongle.
The Dongle is equipped with a number of LEDs to help during system installation and repair.
Table 32:
Dongle Status LEDs
Parts
Name
DS1
TxD to laptop
Schematics
Indication
Status
Remarks
DS2
RxD from laptop
DS5
Isolated supply for
communication
DS7
RUN
1 flash per second
DS8
TxD to flasher
system
DS9
RxD from flasher
system
If one of these LEDs is OFF, there is no
Normally OFF.
traffic on the corresponding bus.
Lights up momentarily during
If one of these LEDs stays ON, there may
transmission or reception.
be a polarity inversion on the bus.
Normally OFF.
90
If one of these LEDs is OFF, there is no
Lights up momentarily during traffic on the corresponding bus.
transmission or reception.
If one of these LEDs stays ON, there may
be a polarity inversion on the bus.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
COM-PC
•
4.11.5.3 Dip-switch bank
Disclaimer
The cable between the laptop and the Dongle:
Both are interconnected with a null-modem cable (DB9 female -- DB9 female) with the
following minimum configuration:
Dongle J3
Pin 2 (RxD)
Pin 3 (TxD)
Pin 3 (TxD)
Pin 2 (RxD)
Pin 5 (GND)
Pin 5 (GND)
Pin 7 (RTS)
Pin 8 (CTS)
Pin 8 (CTS)
Pin 7 (RTS)
Table of
Contents
•
Cable between dongle and ICC or MCC:
This should be a pin-to-pin (DB9 male -- DB9 male) cable with the following layout:
Dongle
MCC or ICC
Pin 2
RxD
Pin 3
TxD
Pin 5
GND
Pin 7
RTS
Pin 9
+15 Vdc
Safety
4.11.5.2 Cable layout
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Multi-wire Remote Control and Monitoring Interface PCB 1486
The dip-switch bank that is mounted on the Dongle is used to set the communication speed
parameters. Set the switches to 10101010 if not already set like this by default. In the
configuration menu of the software, choose the used COM port on your laptop, ‘38400’ bd &
‘EVEN’ parity. This will allow proper communication between the ICCs, MCC and the Dongle.
Connection: ICC , Dongle and Laptop
Schematics
Parts
Operation
Figure 47:
Installation Introduction
Multi-wire
Remote
Control and
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
91
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Initial Software Installation and Software Use
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
4.12 Initial Software
Installation and
Software Use
This section provides additional details on use of the software.
4.12.1 Configuration tool
You can operate the equipment directly from your PC with the configuration tool.
WARNING
Table of
Contents
Do not use the configuration tool unless you have permission to do so. If you
activate the configuration tool, you transfer all control of the equipment to the tool.
In this situation, remote or local control of the equipment is not possible.
4.12.1.1 Install the configuration
tool
Safety
4.12.1.2 System requirements:
The configuration tool is software that gives you full control of the entire equipment from your
PC. You can use the tool to configure the equipment after installation or maintenance work.
— PC with Microsoft Windows operating system;
— At least 50 Mbytes free disk space;
— 1 free serial communication (COM) port, or a virtual serial communication port over a
USB bridge or a PCMCIA card;
Introduction Installation
Initial Software Installation and
— PC user account with either administrator or power user rights.
4.12.1.3 Configuration tool
package:
— 1 dongle with embedded software;
— 1 installation CD-Rom with a flasher program;
— 2 cables:
— Extension cable (DB9M/DB9M-1,5 m);
— Cable null modem (DB9F/DB9F-1,8 m).
4.12.1.4 Install software
1. Open Windows Explorer.
2. In Windows Explorer, open the main folder of the installation CD-ROM.
3. Run the setup application file. Follow the instructions of the installation program. The
software is now installed.
Operation
4. Copy the system upgrade files (.upl) from the installation CD to the directory where you
installed the software.
4.12.1.5 Connect cables
1. Make sure the equipment is switched OFF.
2. Open the cabinet.
3. Connect the extension cable to the dongle (B) and to the PC connector of the cabinet (A). 
You can connect directly to any ICC cabinet or to the LMC PCB in the MCC.
Parts
4. Connect the cable null modem to the dongle (B) and to the serial communication port of
your PC (C).
4.12.1.6 Start software
1. Switch the equipment ON. The equipment also supplies power to the dongle.
Schematics
2. Start the configuration tool. Go to Start > All programs > MCR_WIN > MCR_WIN.
Alternatively click the MCR_WIN.exe file in the directory where you installed the software.
The configuration tool opens.
3. Select the menu Configuration.
4. Select the applicable serial communication port (COM) to which you connected the
dongle.
NOTE: The baud rate and parity settings for the communication between the PC, dongle and
the equipment must be the same. For the dongle, the default baud rate is 38400 and the
default parity setting is EVEN.
5. The dongle makes the connection to the equipment automatically.
92
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Configuration tool
Disclaimer
Figure 48:
Table of
Contents
4.12.2 Upload New
Software
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Initial Software Installation and Software Use
3. Go to menu Configuration > Upload software.
4. Select Click here to upload. You can now see the available software versions on your PC.
5. Select and confirm GKFL (dongle). 
The software is now uploading.
CAUTION
You must configure the system layout again after you do this procedure. When you
reset the LMC, the system starts to use the default parameters.
Operation
6. Save the installation files of the new software to your PC.
Installation Introduction
Initial Software Installation and
2. Open the configuration tool.
Safety
1. Save the installation files of the new software to your PC.
8. Go to menu Configuration > Upload software.
9. Select Click here to upload. You can now see the available software versions on your PC.
10. Select and confirm LM (LMC). The software is now uploading.
Parts
7. Open the configuration tool.
SW4 Settings
Table 33:
Dip
1
2
3
4
5
X
ON
OFF
Schematics
11. If the uploading is successful, reset the LMC. Set the dip-switch SW4 as follows:
X
X
X
6
7
8
X
X
X
X
12. Switch OFF the cabinet, where the LMC is installed. Leave the cabinet OFF for
approximately 10 seconds.
13. Switch ON the cabinet, where the LMC is installed.
14. Set the dip-switch SW4 of the LMC PCB as follows:
Table 34:
Dip
SW4 Settings
1
2
3
4
5
ON
OFF
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
X
X
X
X
6
7
8
X
X
X
X
93
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Initial Software Installation and Software Use
Disclaimer
•
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
SW 2 should be moved to ON and then back to OFF in order to reset.
15. Configure the system layout. See “Action 4: Software based configuration” on page 59.
CAUTION
You must configure the system layout before you can do this procedure. 
See “Action 4: Software based configuration” on page 59.
Table of
Contents
16. Save the installation files of the new software to your PC.
17. Open the configuration tool.
18. Go to menu Configuration > Upload software.
19. Select Click here to upload. You can now see the available software versions on your PC.
Safety
20. Select and confirm FCU.
21. Select the specific FCU PSBs, the software of which you want to upgrade. 
The software is now uploading.
Introduction Installation
Initial Software Installation and
Operation
Parts
Schematics
94
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Initial Software Installation and Software Use
Configuration tool screen
Disclaimer
Figure 49:
Table of
Contents
A
Safety
D
Operation
Installation Introduction
Initial Software Installation and
B
C
A Menu bar
B Status view
C Communication connection status view
Table 35:
Screen item
Description
Menu bar
The menu bar shows the available menu items and the Exit button.
Status view
This view is always visible. The view shows the present status of the
input and output current. It allows you to change the selected
brightness step and select the active circuits. The view also shows
error messages and status of burnt lamps.
Communication
connection status
view
Active menu view
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
This view shows possible communication errors between the dongle
and the equipment.
The active menu changes when you select a menu item from the
menu bar. You can scroll this view up or down.
95
Schematics
Parts
D Active menu view
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Initial Software Installation and Software Use
Disclaimer
4.12.2.1 Control menu
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
The menu allows you to change the active flasher mode and step. You can also reset
counters.
Table 36:
Table of
Contents
Safety
4.12.2.2 Mode menu
Control menu
Item
Description
Mode name
Change the active flasher mode.
Step number
Change the active brightness step for the sequence flashers.
Step number for REILS
Change the active brightness step for the REILS units.
Reset bus counters
Reset the error counters for bus communication.
Reset counters in all flashers
Reset the misfire counters for all flashers. You can do this, for
example, after you replace a broken lamp.
Reset counters in a single flasher
Reset the misfire counters for a specific flasher. You can do this,
for example, after you replace a broken lamp.
The menu allows you to check and adjust the predefined mode settings.
CAUTION
Introduction Installation
Initial Software Installation and
Be careful when you change the settings. If you change the settings of an active
mode, the changes will take effect immediately.
Table 37:
Mode menu
Item
Description
Operational modes
Check or adjust the predefined mode settings. Note that if you
change the cycle time, the number of flashes per second also
changes.
Details of mode
4.12.2.3 Flasher data menu
Status menu
The menu shows the on-line status of all flashers in the system.
Operation
Table 38:
Status menu
Item
Description
Individual flasher state
The menu shows the on-line status of all flashers in the system.
You can view the statuses, but you cannot change anything.
Active state menu
Parts
The menu allows you to check the actual state of each flasher. You can also compare the
actual state to the requested commands.
Table 39:
Active state menu
Schematics
Item
Description
Individual active state
The menu shows the actual state of each flasher. It also shows
the latest requested step and mode. If there is a difference
between the actual state and a requested state, the difference is
shown in seconds.
Misfire state and counter menu system
The menu allows you to set limits for the allowed number of misfires for each flasher in the
counter menu system.
Table 40:
96
Misfire state and counter menu
Item
Description
Individual misfire state
Set a misfire limit for each flasher in the system. The limit is
based on the number misfires a lamp is allowed to produce
before an alarm is sent. Note that in this menu, you can only
change the limit field.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Initial Software Installation and Software Use
Table 41:
Flasher counter menu
Item
Description
Individual flash limit
Set a lamp life limit for each flasher in the system. The limit is based on
the number of flashes a lamp is allowed to produce before it must be
replaced. Note that in this menu, you can only change the limit field.
Flasher temperature data menu
The menu show the internal and external temperatures of the cabinets. The external
temperature is shown only if the external temperature probe (option) is installed.
Table 42:
Flasher temperature menu
Item
Description
Individual temperature parameters
The menu shows the internal temperature of the cabinets. If the
external temperature probe (option) is installed, the menu also
shows the external temperature of the cabinets and the
possible difference between the two temperatures. You can
also set a minimum and maximum allowed temperatures. You
can view the statuses, but you cannot change anything.
Flasher security menu
The menu allows you to check and adjust the predefined mode settings.
Flasher security menu
Item
Description
Security parameters
The menu shows the status of all MOV modules and door
switches in the system. You can view the statuses, but you
cannot change anything. Example: FCU-3 cabinets:
•
•
Operation
Table 43:
Safety
The menu allows you to set limits for the lamp life of each flasher in the system.
Table of
Contents
Disclaimer
Flasher counter limit menu
Installation Introduction
Initial Software Installation and
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
If the door switch status is open for only one flasher, the lamp cover may be open.
If the door switch status is open for all three flashers, the cabinet door is open.
Flasher steps menu
CAUTION
Do not change the settings, unless it is absolutely necessary. If you change the
settings of an active step, the changes will take effect immediately.
Table 44:
Flasher steps menu
Item
Description
Steps
Configure the intensity level steps (1-3) separately for each flasher in the
system.
Software version menu
The menu shows you the firmware and boot versions present in the system.
Table 45:
Software version menu
Item
Description
Master and flasher software
version
The menu shows the firmware and boot versions present in the system.
For example, Local Master Controller (LMC), dongle, and flashers.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
97
Schematics
Parts
The menu allows you to configure the intensity levels of each step.
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Initial Software Installation and Software Use
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Read communication counters menu
The menu allows you to check the status of communication counters for individual flashers.
Table 46:
Read communication counters menu
Table of
Contents
Item
Description
Read communication
counters
The menus shows the status of communication counters for individual
flashers. To request the status for a specific flasher, enter the flasher
number in the field "Request read from flasher".
Read flasher counters menu
The menu allows you to check the status of flasher counters for individual flashers.
Table 47:
Read flasher counters menu
Safety
Item
Description
Read flash counters
The menus shows the status of flash counters for individual flashers. To
request the status for a specific flasher, enter the flasher number in the
field "Request read from flasher".
Introduction Installation
Initial Software Installation and
Operation
Parts
Schematics
98
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Starting Up
4.13.1 Open all the Doors
of the ICC Cabinets and
the MCC
Disclaimer
4.13 Starting Up
1. Ensure that the Master Control Cabinet (MCC) door is open
2. Ensure all ICC doors are open
3. Verify that fuselinks F1 & F2 are removed (opened)
4. Set the Rotary Switch in the MCC to the OFF position
Table of
Contents
5. Switch ON the main AC Supply
6. Verify that the input voltage to the MCC is correct
7. Switch ON Circuit Breaker CB1 in the MCC
8. On the MCC:
— Pullout door interlock switch to lock into ON position
Safety
— Switch system ON using the Rotary Switch to Low intensity Verify that the input
voltage to each ICC is correct
— Check all LEDs on the LMC board in the MCC
Installation Introduction
Starting Up
— Switch the system to Medium and High using the Rotary Switch. Return to Low
intensity.
— Verify input voltage is correct at each ICC
— Turn CB1 off in the MCC
9. Go progressively to all ICCs in turn:
— Replace fuselinks F1 & F2
— Pull out each door interlock switch to lock them in the ON position
10. Turn on CB1 in the MCC
11. Check all ICC flasher control PCB LEDs
12. System should flash at the correct rate and be functionally operational
Operation
13. Set the Master Rotary Switch in the Remote Position and verify operation in Remote
Control
14. Close all cabinet doors
MCC LED Indications
Indication
DS1
Isolated supply Bus A
DS2
Isolated supply Bus B
DS3
Isolated supply local bus
DS4
Reserved
DS5
RUN
DS6
Rx local bus
DS7
Tx local bus
DS8
Rx bus A
DS9
Tx bus A
DS10
Rx bus B
DS11
Tx bus B
Table 49:
Status
ON
For future use
1 flash per second
Higher rate during software upload
One of these LEDs permanently 
Normally OFF
OFF, no traffic on the corresponding bus.
Lights up momentarily
during transmission or
One of these LEDs permanently 
reception.
ON, polarity in version on the bus (most
probably).
ICC LED Indications
Name
Indication
Status
DS1
FLASH command
Duration is
proportional to the
selected step
DS2
RUN
1 Flash per second
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Remarks
Parts
Name
Remarks
Higher rate during software upload
99
Schematics
Table 48:
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Shutdown Procedures
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Name
Indication
Status
Remarks
One of these LEDs permanently 
Normally OFF
OFF, no traffic on the corresponding bus.
Lights up momentarily
during transmission or One of these LEDs permanently 
ON, polarity in version on the bus (most
reception.
probably).
Table of
Contents
DS3
Rx local bus
DS4
Tx local bus
DS5
Isolated supply local bus ON
DS6
FLASH
Duration is
proportional to the
selected step.
Hardware flash command to IGBT Driver
The flash lamp(s) must flash at a rate of 1 or 2 flashes/sec, as applicable.
Safety
Check the brightness steps by switching the rotary switch in the MCC cabinet to low, medium
and high.
Introduction Installation
Shutdown
Procedures
4.14 Shutdown
Procedures
This subsection describes emergency and equipment shutdown procedures.
4.14.1 Emergency
Shutdown
Set the master control cabinet disconnect switch CB1 to OFF. This removes all power to the
system, except power to the maintenance light and outlet in the master control cabinet.
4.14.2 Equipment
Shutdown
Equipment shutdown involves shutting down the master control cabinet switches and the
individual control cabinets.
Table 50:
Operation
4.14.2.1 Master Control Cabinet
Switches Shutdown
Master Control Cabinet Switches Shutdown
System
Set to this position…
To remove…
MALSR/ALSF
Disconnect switch CB1 to OFF Power from all circuits
MALSR Only
Circuit breaker CB4 to OFF
Power from approach lights
MALSR/ALSF
Circuit breaker CB3 to OFF
240 Vac power to sequenced flashers
MALSR/ALSF
Circuit breaker CB2 to OFF
120 Vac power from master control cabinet circuits
To remove power from the master control cabinet switches, refer to Table 50.
1. If operated in Remote Control, command the system to OFF.
2. Open the Master Control Cabinet (MCC) door.
3. Set the Rotary Switch in the MCC to the OFF position.
Parts
4. Switch OFF Circuit Breaker CB1 in the MCC.
4.14.2.2 Individual Control
Cabinet Shutdown
To shut down the individual control cabinet, perform the following procedure:
Schematics
1. Open the door of the individual control cabinet. The interlock switch disconnects the input 
240 Vac power to the cabinet.
2. Open up both fuse links in the ICC.
3. Wait a minimum of one minute before working inside the ICC.
100
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Maintenance
•
•
•
•
5.1 Replacement of
the ICC Board
Only qualified personnel may install or repair electrical equipment in accordance with NFPA 70B,
Electrical Equipment Maintenance and NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces.
Disconnect and tag out the sources supplying electrical power to this device before making or repairing
connections to this device in accordance with airport lockout and tagout procedures.
Use approved testing equipment to test that the circuit is de-energized.
All applicable regulations in accordance with local codes and FAA standards must be followed.
•
The cover plate (EMC protection plate) over the ICC board is fixed with 4 fast locking
screws (quarter turn to unlock). Remove the ribbon cable attached to the cover. Remove
the cover.
•
•
Take note of the position of the connectors before disconnecting the board.
•
The board is fixed with 9 screws M3; in every corner and in the middle of each axis, and
with 2 screws M4; next to the two transistors 2SK1120: Q7 and Q9. To improve the heat
transfer of the two transistors (Q7 and Q9) to the mounting plate, there is a heat
conductive paste between the mounting plate and the aluminum heat sink. Apply heat
sink paste on the replacement board. All screws should always be put back in place!
•
In the “ICC-3” there are 2 ICC boards mounted on the left- and right-hand side of the
cabinet.
•
These boards are mounted on a special mounting plate that is fixed to the rear plate by
means of 4 screws M4 and to the cabinet with 2 screws M5.
•
Before mounting the ICC board to the special mounting plate, check on which side the
plate should be mounted.
•
•
•
Mount the board. Reconnect the board.
Take note of the dip-switch settings on the ICC board. (also jumper-setting of the local
bus)
Check the switch settings and the jumper settings before reinstalling the cover.
Check the operation of the board.
5.1.1 Replacement of the
Electrolytic Capacitor
Take care to connect this capacitor with the correct polarity. Reversing the polarity will not
only damage the capacitor, but also the control electronics. Inverting the polarity may result in
serious injury.
5.1.2 Replacement of the
DC power Supply
This power supply is equipped with two connectors plugs at the top (AC) and six connectors
at the bottom (DC).
The input AC voltage for the DC power supply is derived from connector P7 on an ICC board
(the left one in case of an ICC -3) in the cabinet. The supply is mounted by means of 2 screws
M4 on the rear plate and can be removed for troubleshooting purposes.
The output DC voltage(s) are distributed inside the cabinet (from one to the other ICC boards
in the case of an ICC-3, by means of six wires).
Table 51:
Voltage
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
DC supply voltages
Brown wire
Red wires
Black wires
White wire
+15V
+5V
GND
-15V
101
Safety
DANGER
Installation Introduction
Maintenance
Read installation instructions in their entirety before starting installation.
Operation
•
Maintenance
WARNING
Table of
Contents
Disclaimer
5.0 Maintenance
Schematics
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Replacement Optional Over-voltage Protection
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
5.2 Replacement
Optional Over-voltage
Protection
There is no special equipment required to replace the cartridge but replacement cartridges
must be of the same type and have to be plugged in correctly to be effective.
5.3 Local Master
Controller (LMC) and
remote control PCBs
If you replace some of the PCBs described in this section, you must also configure the
system, as instructed by the procedures. Before you can configure the system, you must
change some dip-switch settings to enable configuration. For more information on
configuration, see Configuring the System.
5.3.1 LMC
1. Switch ON the equipment.
Figure 50:
Over-voltage protection cartridges
Table of
Contents
3. Go to menu SAVE.
4. Save the used IO profile. Select Save and save the profile on your PC.
5. Switch OFF all power to the equipment.
6. Open the Master Control Cabinet (MCC) door.
7. Note the locations of all cables connected to the LMC PCB.
8. Disconnect the cables to the LMC PCB.
Operation
9. Take out the eight nuts (A).
B
8
10. Replace the LMC PCB (B). Copy the dipswitch and jumper
settings from the old PCB.
0
6
4
11. Put in the eight nuts (A)
12. Connect the cables to the connectors:
Maintenance
— Power distribution from the DC unit to TB1;
— MOV connection to P6;
A
— Door switch to P7;
— Optional modules to P8;
P8
SW5
SW4
8
P9
P8
P6
SW1
P5
DS10
DS8
J5
DS11
DS9
P4
DS7
DS6
DS4
W19
W20
14. Switch ON the equipment.
J4
DS5
DS3
W18
W17
W14
J3
DS2
J2
15. Open the configuration tool.
P5
DS1
J1
W15
P3
W7
W8
W9
W10
W11
W12
W16
P2
P1
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
P3
16. Go to menu SAVE.
P7
4
SW1
TB1
— J-Bus connection to P1 (optional).
TB1
SW3
6
13. Close the cabinet door.
P6
W13
Schematics
— Local bus to P2 or P3;
P7
2
— Multiwire connection to P5;
0
Safety
Introduction Installation
Replacement Optional Over-
2. Open the configuration tool.
P2
P1
17. Restore the IO profile. Select Restore and browse to the saved profile on your PC.
18. Switch OFF all power to the equipment.
102
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
This procedure applies to both 24 V DC and 48 V DC type of multiwire PCBs.
Disclaimer
5.3.2 Multiwire
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Local Master Controller (LMC) and remote control PCBs
1. Make sure that all power to the equipment
is OFF.
2. Open the cabinet door.
3. Disconnect the cables from the PCB (B).
Table of
Contents
4. Take out the six nuts (A).
Safety
5. Replace the PCB (B). Make sure you use the same type of
PCB. Copy the jumper settings from the old PCB.
Installation Introduction
Local Master Controller (LMC)
6. Put back the six nuts (A). Use a number 5.5mm socket
wrench.
7. Connect the cables to the connectors:
— Power supply to J1;
— LMC to P3;
— Input and output signal connectors to P1 and P2.
8. Switch ON the equipment.
9. Open the configuration tool.
10. Go to menu IO.
5.3.3 Multiwire cable
1. Make sure that all power to the equipment is OFF.
2. Open the cabinet door.
3. Disconnect the flat multiwire cable from the connector P5 of the LMC PCB and P3 of the
multiwire PCB.
4. Put in the new multiwire cable.
5. Connect the flat multiwire cable to the connector P5 of the LMC PCB and P3 of the
multiwire PCB.
6. Close the cabinet door.
NOTE: The replacement LMC board will not have pre-existing jumpers at W15, W16 or W18.
Substitute the jumpers from the replaced board or substitute the unused jumpers on W1-W6.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
103
Schematics
12. Close the cabinet door.
Maintenance
Operation
11. Check all multiwire settings. If necessary, click the fields
next to the terminal names to open a selection window (see
the graphic).
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
5.4 ALSF/MALSR
Maintenance
5.4.1 Maintenance
Schedule
To keep the MALSR and ALSF operating efficiently, follow a preventive maintenance
schedule. Refer to Table 52. Refer to FAA AC 150/5340-26 for more detailed information.
Table 52:
MALSR/ALSF Maintenance
Table of
Contents
Interval
Maintenance Task
Action
Visually check all lights, including
flashers, on all brightness steps.
Replace lamps, if necessary.
Clean optical surface if dirty.
Monthly
Check for presence of moisture.
Visually check for dim lamp.
Safety
Check for lamp aging or physical
displacement.
Introduction Installation
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
Check sequenced flasher flash rate.
Verify flash rate (120 flashes per minute)
either visually or, using Flasher Tester
laptop.
Tolerances:
•
•
Every Three Months
Check remote control function.
Initial: ±2 flashes per minute
Operating: ±2 flashes per minute
Operate system in all remote control
steps to verify operation.
Visually check for damaged (such as
broken elevated or in-pavement lens) Repair or replace lights.
or misaligned lights.
Operation
According to local
practice (or annually)
Visually check the approach line-ofsight clearance for vegetation or
other obstructions.
1. Remove vegetation.
If consistent with airport
requirements, check for water in
excess of six inches in base can.
Pump water from base.
Maintenance
According to local
practice (manufacturer Check for improper torque on inrecommendation is
pavement hold-down bolts.
once every 60 days)
Check elevated flashing fixture
vertical and horizontal angles.
Vertical angle for elevated flasher is
normally 6°.
Schematics
Annually
104
2. Use weed killer.
Remove and inspect light for water
damage.
Torque six fixture bolts (cross-corner) to 
185 ±5 in.-lbs (20.902 ±0.565 N•m).
Readjust using aiming device.
Tolerances:
Initial: ±1°
Operating: ±2°
Record meter readings
Measure the input voltage at the MCC,
Take system out of service according each FCU and the 15KVA transformer in
to local practice.
the High intensity step.
When finished, return the system to Line-Line voltage must be:
service according to local practice.
240Vac ±3% (Initial) and ±5%
See Operating the System section for (Operating)
procedure.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Record meter readings
Measure the input current at the MCC
Take system out of service according
and the 15KVA transformer in all three
to local practice.
steps.
When finished, return the system to
Record as reference data for use in
service according to local practice.
future preventive maintenance and
See Operating the System section for troubleshooting efforts.
procedure.
Each side of the Line-Neutral voltage
must beTake system out of service according
• High: 120Vac
to local practice.
When finished, return the system to
service according to local practice.
•
•
Safety
Record meter readings
Medium: 75Vac
Low: 50Vac
The Line-Line voltage must be-
See Operating the System section for •
•
Procedure.
•
High: 240Vac
Medium: 150Vac
Low: 100Vac
•
•
±3% (Initial)
±5% (Operating)
Tolerances on all measurements:
Verify +400 Vdc output voltage from each
FCU is “OK” using Flasher Tester laptop.
Annually (Optional)
Record meter readings
Record as reference data for use in
future preventive maintenance and
troubleshooting efforts.
Check all structures for rot or
corrosion. Check all light supports for
Re-paint, repair or replace.
rigidity, guy tensions, and obvious
misalignment.
Remove power at input of MCC.
Wait 1 minute before working on FCU
cabinets.
Annually
Check equipment electrical
connections.
Visually inspect lighting arrestors.
Check that all terminal connections and
cable connections are tight and clean.
Replace or tighten all connections that
show signs of heating.
Check for obstruction in in-pavement
Clean channel and prism surface.
output channel.
(Elevated) Check for dirty lens.
Clean with glass cleaner.
Check fuse holders, circuit breakers,
Repair or replace.
door switches and relays.
Every 3 Years
Check conductor and insulation
resistance of all power and control
cables.
Record all measurements and compare
with previous readings.
Open the light assembly. Clean fixtures,
if necessary, to maintain full light output.
Check for interior cleanliness or
During Lamp Changes presence of moisture inside light
fixture.
If Moisture present•
•
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
In-pavement: Replace O-rings and other
parts found defective. Use pressure test
plug to verify no leakage is present.
Perform meg check.
Elevated: Check drain holes. Replace
gasket if defective
105
Installation Introduction
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
Annually
Remove the cover on the transformer.
Measure the 15KVA transformer output
voltage.
Table of
Contents
Action
Operation
Maintenance Task
Maintenance
Interval
Disclaimer
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
Schematics
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Interval
After 900 hours of
operation in High
intensity
Maintenance Task
Action
It is recommended to replace all
xenon flash lamps systematically
when, at full intensity, 90% of the
useful life has been reached
Table of
Contents
During winter months, permanently mark
location of low mounted elevated fixtures
on either side of the runway using red
flags or sticks to facilitate snow removal
and lessen the risk of damage to the
fixtures by snow removal equipment.
If heavy snowfall
predicted
Safety
After snow removal
Replace the lamps.
Check for damaged in-pavement
light fixtures.
Replace damaged fixtures. Use broom
for snow removal. Follow recommended
snow removal techniques described in
AC 150/5200-30.
Introduction Installation
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
Operation
Maintenance
Schematics
106
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
5.4.2 Maintenance
Procedures
WARNING
Read installation instructions in their entirety before starting maintenance.
+400 Vdc is present in the individual control cabinet and the flasher light unit.
Interlock switches are provided in the cabinets and flasher head to remove power
when the cabinet door is opened or the lamp is removed. Allow one minute for
the flash capacitors to discharge before touching any electrical parts in the
cabinet. Verify that they are discharged by touching a wire connecting the 400
V TB2 terminal to earth ground.
This subsection describes maintenance procedures listed below for the MALSR and ALSF
systems.
Safety
checking electrical connections
inspecting and replacing flash lamp
Installation Introduction
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
inspecting and replacing lamp gaskets
replacing lamps
Checking performance involves the following:
•
•
•
•
checking flash rate
checking skipped flashes
checking system voltage
checking equipment visually
5.4.3 Checking System
Voltage
Checking system voltage involves checking master control cabinet and individual control
cabinet voltages.
5.4.3.1 Checking the Master
Control Cabinet Voltages
To check the master control cabinet voltages, perform the following procedure:
1. While operating the system at the high intensity level, measure the input voltage between
terminal block TB1 terminals 1 and 3.
2. Refer to Table 53 to verify the input voltages on the master control cabinet.
NOTE: Use a true RMS multimeter to measure the voltages in Table 53.
5.4.3.2 Checking the Individual
Control Cabinet Voltages
Master Control/Individual Control Cabinet Input Voltages
Across Terminal Block
TB1
AC Voltages
Terminals 1 to 2
120 Vac 5%
Terminals 2 to 3
120 Vac 5%
Terminals 1 to 3
240 Vac 5%
Maintenance
Table 53:
To check individual control cabinet voltages, perform the following procedure:
1. While operating the system at the high intensity level, open the individual cabinet door
and pull out the plunger on the interlock switch.
2. Measure voltage between 1 and 2 on the input terminal block.
3. Verify the voltage at the input terminals of all the individual control cabinets is 240 Vac
5%.
NOTE: Use a true RMS voltmeter to measure the voltages in Table 53.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Operation
5.4.2.1 Checking System
Performance
checking performance
107
Schematics
•
•
•
•
•
Disclaimer
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
Table of
Contents
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
Disclaimer
5.4.4 Checking the
Equipment Visually
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
To check the equipment visually, perform the following procedure:
1. Operate the system on all three brightness steps and visually verify that lamps switch to
the brightness level selected.
2. Record any lamp failures and broken filters.
3. Replace lamps and filters when the system is turned off.
Table of
Contents
4. Inspect all lamps and filters for damage or misalignment.
5. Check for cracks, pits, and any evidence of leaks around the lamp and filter gaskets.
6. Replace any damaged glassware or gaskets.
7. Clean dirty glassware using a liquid glass cleaner and wipe dry with a soft clean cotton
cloth.
8. Check light supports and guys for rigidity, misalignment, and rust or corrosion.
Safety
9. Check for dirt or water in the interior of all cabinets. Check gaskets in cabinet interiors for
cracks or any sign of deterioration.
10. Remove dirt from the interior of the cabinets and replace gaskets showing signs of
deterioration.
Introduction Installation
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
5.4.4.1 Checking the Electrical
Connections
To check electrical connections, perform the following procedure:
1. Check operation of interlock switches in the master and the individual control cabinets.
2. Check terminal blocks, PC boards, and connectors for any signs of dirt, corrosion, or
moisture. Clean if necessary. Check all terminal connections for tightness.
3. Check lightning arrestor connections for tightness and any evidence of damage. Replace
any damaged arrestors.
5.4.5 In-pavement Flashing
Light
The assembly's service life depends to a large extent on being waterproof. All metal mating
surfaces and seals must be clean, smooth, dry and free of all foreign particles if the light
fixture is to operate for extended periods without requiring maintenance.
Greasing of O-ring seals may be required as indicated in this manual.
Operation
Preventive maintenance of the light fixtures should be performed as listed in Table 55.
Maintenance frequency depends on the conditions under which the runway is used (i.e.
climate, traffic, etc.). The recommended practices for maintenance are described in the FAA
advisory circular no. AC 150/5340-26.
Maintenance
For components mentioned in this chapter, refer to the Exploded View, Figure 61.
Always turn the fixture upside down next to the base when lifting it out of the base.
5.4.5.1 How to open the light
assembly
To open the light assembly, proceed as follows (for tools to use, refer to Table 53:)
Step Action
Schematics
1. Turn the light unit upside down.
2. Remove the pressure release screw.
3. Remove the 6 lamp enclosure screws.
108
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
4. Insert a flathead tip in the dedicated slot between cover and inner cover and rotate it to
separate the inner cover from the cover.
5.4.5.2 How to replace a lamp
1. Disconnect the fast-on connectors of the lamp from the printed circuit board.
2. Using soft cotton gloves, remove the lamp from the printed circuit board part, holding the
reflector.
Disclaimer
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
a. The lamp is supplied ready for installation.
b. Make sure that the lamp is positioned so that the trigger wire is in the position shown
in Figure 51.
c. Gently position the lamp with its grommets on the lamp holder clamps and push down.
Table of
Contents
3. Install a new lamp:
4. Reassemble the light fixture in reverse order.
5.4.5.3 How to replace the
trigger and lampholder PCBs
1. Disconnect the wires from the terminal block, by inserting a small screwdriver in the upper
contact hole and pushing on the spring contact of each particular terminal. See How to
replace a lamp above.
2. Remove the faulty or defective PCB(s) by removing the screws.
3. Position the new PCB(s) with new dampers.
4. Torque down the fixing screws.
5. Connect the wires to the terminal block and reinstall the lamp(s).
Lamp Position
90°
Trigger wire
Operation
Figure 51:
Installation Introduction
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
e. Never touch the quartz bulb of the lamp with your bare fingers. It will reduce the
lifetime of the lamp considerably. Should this happen, clean the bulb with isopropyl
alcohol. Make sure there is good contact between the fast-on connectors and the
terminals.
Safety
d. The lamp is very brittle so handle with care.
Reflector
Lamp
Maintenance
Fast-on contact cathode
Lamp cut
Schematics
PCB surface
Cable terminal
Trigger/Connection PCB
4072.20.810
Fast-on contact
Lamp/Reflector PCB
4072.02.181
Clamp grommets in lamp support
PCB Screws
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
109
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
Disclaimer
5.4.5.4 How to close and test
the light fixture
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
To close an optical unit, proceed as follows:
1. Turn the cover upside down.
2. Make sure that the contact surfaces with the O-ring are clean.
3. Put a new O-ring gasket greased with Novagard G322L (ADB p/n 67A0009) silicone
grease over the cover in the appropriate groove.
Table of
Contents
4. Remove the pressure release screw.
5. Gently put the inner cover on the cover, taking into account the keying pin between both
parts.
6. Press the inner cover on the cover and secure with the screws.
7. Dielectric test:
Check the electrical insulation from the 5-pole plug male wires to the light fixture body
Safety
Interconnect wire terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 together
— This can be accomplished by attaching a mating receptacle (ADB p/n 4072.03.960)
and connecting to the conductors on the end of the cable assembly
Introduction Installation
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
Using a meg-ohmmeter, measure the insulation resistance between these wires and the
fixture body. Insure the resistance, after 1 minute is:
— >1G ohms at 1000VDC, or alternately
— >1G ohms at 500VDC
NOTE: Make sure that the earth ground terminal is not included in the measurement
8. Closing and Testing the Fixture
— Remove the Pressure Release Screw.
— A Pressure Testing Device is used to pressure test the fixture. It screws into the
pressure release port on the bottom cover and accepts a typical air hose fitting.
— Put entire fixture in bucket of water.
Operation
— Pressure test at 20 psi (137.9 kPa) for one minute in water and look carefully for any
air bubbles emanating from the light fixture.
NOTE: The Pressure Testing Device has a 40 psi (275.8 kPa) relief valve so the fixture
cannot be over pressurized.
— Remove the Pressure Testing Device.
Maintenance
Schematics
110
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
— Make sure the O-ring seal of the pressure release screw is in good condition and resecure the Pressure Release Screw.
Table of
Contents
Pressure Release
Screw
Disclaimer
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
NOTE: When Grade AV Loctite is used, the bolts must be torqued to 185 5 inchpounds (20.902 0.565 N•m).
2. If anti-seize is used, contact the manufaturer for recommended torque values.
NOTE: 
a. Always torque the bolts across the corners. See Figure 17. To torque mounting bolts
across corners, tighten bolts in noted sequence: #1 and #4, then #2 and #5, then #3 
and #6.
b. Applying more than one drop of Loctite to the bolt threads will create future difficulty in
removal of the bolts.
c. After several re-lampings, threaded holes may accumulate dirt and excessive Loctite.
If this occurs, screws may not seat properly. Clean tapped holes with a wire brush or
hand tap, then blow off with clean, dry, oil-free low pressure air, or use Loctite Chisel
79040 and spray on threads and allow to soak for 15-30 minutes, depending upon the
amount of build-up. Wipe off or blow off with clean, dry, oil-free low pressure air. After the
bolt has been retorqued three times, replace with a new bolt. If the bolt is continuously
loose, inspect the tapped thread in the light base flange for damage. If the thread is
damaged, contact the ADB Airfield Solutions, Sales Department for a field repair insert kit.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
111
Installation Introduction
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
Operation
1. If thread locking adhesive is used, apply only one drop of Grade AV Loctite to each of
the six 3/8-inch (9.525-mm) diameter mounting bolts. Torque the bolts to 185 5 inchpounds (20.902 0.565 N•m).
Maintenance
To retorque the fixture mounting bolts, perform the following procedure:
Schematics
5.4.5.5 Retorquing the
Mounting Bolts on the Inpavement Flasher
Safety
Pressure Test
Device
P/N 44A6104
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
5.4.6 Individual Control
Cabinets (ICCs)
5.4.6.1 Preventive maintenance
tasks
On each of the ICCs in the system:
•
•
Reconnect fuses F1 and F2.
Pull the door lock towards you and lock it in the ON position.
Table of
Contents
Check the following LEDs of the ICCs through the holes of the EMC plate.
Table 54:
ICC LED Indications
Name
Indication
Status
Remarks
Safety
Introduction Installation
ALSF/MALSR Maintenance
DS1
FLASH command
Duration is proportional to the
selected step. ON time longer
for High, shorter for Med and
shortest for LOW
DS2
RUN
1 FLASH per second
DS3
Rx local bus
DS4
Tx local bus
Normally OFF
Lights up momentarily during
transmission or reception
DS5
Isolated supply local bus
ON
none
DS6
FLASH
ON during flash request
Hardware flash command to IGBT
Driver
none
Higher rate during software upload
One of these LEDs OFF, no traffic
is on the corresponding bus
One of these LEDs stays ON,
there may be a polarity inversion
on the bus.
The flash lamps must flash at the correct rate and selected brilliancy.
Operation
5.4.7 Flashing Sequence
Check the flashing sequence of the whole system. If it is not correct, change the dip-switch
addresses in the ICCs where necessary or adapt the sequence number via the flasher tester
software.
5.4.8 3-in-1 ICC AC Current
Check
Check the power distribution between the phases.
(If applicable, check the neutral current. For an equal number of units distributed over the 3
phases it should be less than 1A RMS. If there is a loading difference of 1 or 2 units between
all the phases it should be less than 2.5 A RMS.)
Maintenance
Schematics
112
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
In this chapter, maintenance of the UEL light is described as well as the procedures of how to
replace the lamp and the optical cartridge. Preventive maintenance of the light fixtures should
be performed as listed in Table 55.
Table of
Contents
Maintenance frequency depends on the conditions under which the runway is used 
(i.e. climate, traffic, etc.). The recommended practices for maintenance are described in the
FAA Advisory Circular no. AC 150/5340-26.
For the numbering of the components mentioned in this chapter, refer to the exploded
Figure 54.
5.5.1 Preventive
Maintenance
In the table below you will find a checklist of preventive maintenance tasks.
5.5.2 How to Replace the
UEL Lamp
Procedure
Step
Action
1
Open the fitting by pulling down the optical cartridge (1).
2
Disconnect the cable from the lamp (2).
3
Remove the optical cartridge and replace it with a new one.
4
Re-connect the lamp cable.
5
Close the optical cartridge.
If serviced in the maintenance shop:
6
1. Remove the lamp by unscrewing the four fixation screws .
2. Clean the cartridge and especially the front glass (1b), check the condition of the reflector (1c), 
the gaskets (1a and 1d) and the spring (7), and replace if needed.
3. Carefully install the new lamp.
4. Retighten the four screws. The optical cartridge is now ready to be used again.
Maintenance
Touching the quartz bulb with bare fingers may seriously shorten the lamp’s life. If the bulb
has been touched, wipe it carefully with a piece of lens cleaning tissue or similar material
moistened with isopropyl alcohol.
Illustration
The illustration in Figure 52 clarifies the procedure described above.
UEL Lamp Assembly
1
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Schematics
Figure 52:
Installation Introduction
UEL Light
Maintenance
Lamp replacement is preferably performed in the maintenance shop but, it can also be done
in the field. The following table instructs you on how to replace a lamp in the maintenance
shop: See Figure 54
Safety
Before attempting service, de-energize and lockout the master control cabinet input power to
insure that the fixture cannot be energized by remote means.
Operation
5.5 UEL Light
Maintenance
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
UEL Light Maintenance
Disclaimer
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
2
113
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
UEL Light Maintenance
Disclaimer
5.5.3 How to Dismantle the
Optical Assembly
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Procedure
The following table instructs you on how to dismantle the optical assembly (usually done in
the maintenance shop):
Step
Action
Table of
Contents
1
Remove the optical cartridge (1) from the light.
2
Remove the lamp (2).
3
Slide the front gasket (1a) around the front of the cartridge. This releases the reflector (1c)
and the front glass (1b).
4
Reassembly is done in the opposite order.
Safety
As the reflector used in the optical assembly is not symmetrical, correct positioning is
necessary and will be obtained when the hole in the reflector corresponds with the positioning
pin of the optical cartridge.
Illustration
The illustration below clarifies the procedure described above.
Introduction Installation
UEL Light
Maintenance
Operation
Figure 53:
UEL Lamp Assembly
Figure 54:
UEL Exploded View
Maintenance
Schematics
114
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
UEL Light Maintenance
Quarterly
According to local
practice (manufacturer’s
recommendation is once
every 60 days)
Action
Visually check all lights, including
flashers, on all brightness steps.
Replace lamps, if necessary.
Visually check for dim lamp.
Clean optical surface if dirty. Check for presence of moisture. Check
for lamp aging or physical displacement.
Check sequenced flasher flash rate.
Verify flash rate (120 flashes per minute) using Flasher Tester laptop.
Tolerances: Initial: ±2 flashes per minute Operating: ±2 flashes per
minute
Check remote control function.
Operate system in all remote control steps to verify operation.
Visually check for damaged (such as
broken elevated or in- pavement lens) or
misaligned lights.
Repair or replace lights.
Visually check the approach line-of-sight
clearance for vegetation or other
obstructions.
1. Remove vegetation.
Check for improper torque on inpavement hold-down bolts.
Torque six fixture bolts (cross-corner) to 185 ±5 in.-lbs (20.902 ±0.565
N•m).
Check elevated flashing fixture vertical
and horizontal angles.
Vertical angle for elevated flasher is
normally 6°.
Table of
Contents
Monthly
Check
Safety
Interval
400 Vdc Flashing Light and MALSR Steady Burning Lights Performance
Checks
2. Use weed killer.
Installation Introduction
UEL Light
Maintenance
Table 55:
Readjust using aiming device.
Tolerances:
Initial: ±1°
Operating: ±2°
Annually
Measure the input voltage at the MCC, each ICC and the 15KVA
transformer in the High intensity step.
When finished, return the system to
service according to local practice.
Line-Line voltage must be:
See Operating the System section for
procedure.
Operation
Record meter readings
Take system out of service according to
local practice.
240Vac ±3% (Initial) and ±5% (Operating)
When finished, return the system to
service according to local practice.
Maintenance
Record meter readings
Take system out of service according to
local practice.
Measure the input current at the MCC and the 15KVA transformer in
all three steps.
Record as reference data for use in future preventive maintenance
and troubleshooting efforts.
Schematics
See Operating the System section for
procedure.
Remove the cover on the 15KVA transformer.
Measure the 15KVA transformer output voltage.
Record meter readings
Take system out of service according to
local practice.
Annually
Each side of the Line-Neutral voltage must be:
High: 120Vac
Medium: 75Vac
When finished, return the system to
service according to local practice.
Low: 50Vac
See Operating the System section for
Procedure.
High: 240Vac
The Line-Line voltage must be:
Medium: 150Vac
Low: 100Vac
Tolerances on all measurements: ±3% (Initial) ±5% (Operating)
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Disclaimer
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
115
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
UEL Light Maintenance
Disclaimer
Interval
Annually (Optional)
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Check
Record meter readings
Action
On Flasher: Active State screen, verify “Capacitor voltage” and “Lamp
current” on each Flasher is OK using Flasher Tester laptop.
Record as reference data for use in future preventive maintenance
and troubleshooting efforts.
Table of
Contents
Check all structures for rot or corrosion.
Check all light supports for rigidity, guy
tensions, and obvious misalignment.
Re-paint, repair or replace.
Remove power at input of MCC.
Wait 1 minute before working on ICC cabinets.
Safety
Check equipment electrical connections.
Visually inspect lighting arrestors.
Check that all terminal connections and cable connections are tight
and clean.
Annually
Replace or tighten all connections that show signs of heating.
Introduction Installation
UEL Light
Maintenance
Check for obstruction in in-pavement
output channel.
Clean channel and prism surface.
(Elevated) Check for dirty lens.
Clean with glass cleaner.
Check fuse holders, circuit breakers, door
Repair or replace.
switches and relays.
Every 3 Years
Check conductor and insulation
Record all measurements and compare with previous readings.
resistance of all power and control cables.
Open the light assembly. Clean fixtures, if necessary, to maintain full
light output.
If Moisture present-
During Lamp Changes
Operation
In-pavement: 
Check for interior cleanliness or presence
Replace O-rings and other parts found defective.
of moisture inside light fixture.
Use pressure test plug to verify no leakage is present. Perform meg
check.
Elevated: 
Replace either gasket if defective
Maintenance
After 900 hours of
operation in High
intensity
It is recommended to replace all xenon
flash lamps systematically when, at full
intensity, 90% of the useful life has been
reached.
Schematics
During winter months, permanently mark location of low mounted
elevated fixtures on either side of the runway using red flags or sticks
to facilitate snow removal and lessen the risk of damage to the fixtures
by snow removal equipment.
If heavy snowfall
predicted
After snow removal
116
Replace the lamps.
Check for damaged in- pavement light
fixtures.
Replace damaged fixtures. Use broom for snow removal. Follow
recommended snow removal techniques described in AC 150/520030.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Troubleshooting and Fault Correction
5.6 Troubleshooting
and Fault Correction
Disclaimer
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
DANGER
•
•
•
•
Only qualified personnel may install or repair electrical equipment in accordance with NFPA 70B,
Electrical Equipment Maintenance and NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces.
Disconnect and tag out the sources supplying electrical power to this device before making or
repairing connections to this device in accordance with airport lockout and tagout procedures.
Use approved testing equipment to test that the circuit is deenergized.
All applicable regulations in accordance with local codes and FAA standards must be followed.
Review the “Safety” on page 1 prior to performing any maintenance steps.
Table of
Contents
•
Please read the following paragraphs for a description of the system:
Technical description, selection and range of applications
Technical data, operation limits
Please read the safety notices and handling precautions at the beginning of this manual
Refer to the wiring diagrams at the end of this manual
5.6.1 General
Troubleshooting Tips
5.6.1.1 Preparation
1. Read technical documentation provided with the system
2. Have 2 copies of ADB equipment manual number 96A0400, “400 V Medium Intensity
Approach Lighting System (MALSR) and Approach Lighting System with Sequenced
Flashers (ALSF)”
One master copy stored in a permanent location
One copy in work area
Additional copies of manuals can be downloaded from the ADB web site at
http://www.adb-airfield.com
Operation
•
•
•
3. Attend manufacturer training classes
4. Insure adequate supply of spare parts are available
5. Make sure you have proper tools
5.6.1.2 Gather information
about the problem
True RMS multi-meter
Current Clamp
Maintenance
•
•
•
Full set of hand tools
1. What are symptoms?
2. When did failure occur?
Schematics
3. Is the failure intermittent?
4. Is the failure in remote control only?
5.6.1.3 Do the easy checks first
1. Visual examination
2. Turn off, then back on
3. Operate in local remote (if applicable)
4. Check fuses
5. Check inputs and outputs
6. Cut problem in half
7. Use manufacturer’s troubleshooting guidelines for assistance
8. Call equipment manufacturer for assistance
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Safety
General description
Installation Introduction
Troubleshooting
and Fault
•
•
•
•
•
117
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Troubleshooting and Fault Correction
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
5.6.2 Troubleshooting:
System fails to flash
5.6.2.1 At the Master Control
Cabinet, verify that:
1. The input power supply is within tolerance (190Vac – 260Vac)
NOTE: Standard FAA tolerances are 240 ±12 volts (228Vac – 252Vac)
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
Troubleshooting
and Fault
•
•
•
•
•
No circuit breaker has tripped
•
At each failing ICC cabinet verify that Rx LED DS3 and Tx LED DS4 are blinking (which
verifies that communication is occurring)
5.6.2.3 At each ICC cabinet,
verify that:
•
•
The FCU board is operational (RUN LED DS2 blinks at a 1 Hz rate)
5.6.2.4 If the optional Modbus
control is present:
•
Verify that the remote control bus communication is operational (LMC, Bus A/LEDs DS8
and DS10 are blinking) (LMC, Bus B/LED DS9 and DS11 are blinking)
•
The input power supply is within tolerance (190Vac – 260Vac)
5.6.2.2 Verify that
communication is present on
the local bus
No fuses are blown
The LMC board is operational (RUN LED DS5 blinks at a 1 Hz rate)
Remote control signals are present and correct
On the LMC board, verify that Rx LED DS6 and Tx LED DS7 are blinking (which verifies
that communication is occurring)
The lamp trigger command is being generated (FLASH LED DS1 flashes twice per
second)
5.6.3 Troubleshooting:
Several units fail to flash
5.6.3.1 Verify at the first failing
ICC cabinet that:
Operation
5.6.3.2 Verify that
communication is present on
the local bus
NOTE: Standard FAA tolerances are 240 ±12 volts (228Vac – 252Vac)
Maintenance
•
•
•
No fuses are blown
•
•
The FCU PCB coding on dipswitch SW1 and SW2 is correct
•
The input power supply is within tolerance (190Vac – 260Vac)
The FCU board is operational (RUN LED DS2 blinks at a 1 Hz rate)
The lamp trigger command is being generated (FLASH LED DS1 flashes twice per
second)
At each failing ICC cabinet verify that Rx LED DS3 and Tx LED DS4 are blinking (which
verifies that communication is occurring)
5.6.4 Troubleshooting:
One unit fails to flash
5.6.4.1 Verify on the failing ICC
cabinet that:
Schematics
5.6.4.2 Verify that
communication is present on
the local bus
5.6.4.3 Then:
118
NOTE: Standard FAA tolerances are 240 ±12 volts (228Vac – 252Vac)
•
•
•
No fuses are blown
•
•
The FCU board coding on dipswitch SW1 and SW2 is correct
•
•
•
The flash energy capacitor charges at about 400V DC (Use laptop to measure voltage)
•
Replace the lamp or
Replace the entire fixture (which replaces the trigger circuitry)
•
Replace the FCU board
The FCU board is operational (RUN LED DS2 blinks at a 1 Hz rate)
The lamp trigger command is being generated (FLASH LED DS1 flashes twice per
second)
The door switch is properly closed and that the safety switch in the flashing lamp fixture is
properly closed
The choke is correctly connected to the FCU board
At the failing ICC cabinet, verify that Rx LED DS3 and Tx LED DS4 are blinking (which
verifies that communication is occurring)
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Troubleshooting and Fault Correction
5.6.5.3 Then:
5.6.6 UEL Light
Assemblies
NOTE: Standard FAA tolerances are 240 ±12 volts (228Vac – 252Vac)
•
•
The FCU board is operational (RUN LED DS2 blinks at a 1 Hz rate)
•
•
•
•
The FCU board coding on dipswitch SW1 and SW2 is correct
•
•
Replace the FCU board
The lamp trigger command is being generated at same rate that flashing should occur
(FCU board/FLASH LED DS1 blinks twice per second for systems that flash twice per
second)
The flash energy capacitor charges at about 400V DC (Use laptop to measure voltage)
The choke is correctly connected to the FCU board
At the failing ICC cabinet, verify that Rx LED DS3 and Tx LED DS4 are blinking (which
verifies that communication is occurring)
Replace the flashing fixture
Table 56:
Troubleshooting the UEL Lights
Problem
Lamp does not
energize.
Solution
Lamp defective
Replace lamp.
Loose or broken contact or
connector
Tighten or replace the contacts or connector.
Moisture present in fixture
Open up and dry, inspect lens for cracks.
Check the gaskets.
Deteriorated wire insulation
Replace wires.
Moisture in assembly
Open up and dry out the assembly. Inspect
the lens for cracks. Check the gaskets.
Schematics
Maintenance
Short lamp life
Possible cause
Table of
Contents
The input power supply is within tolerance (190Vac – 260Vac)
Safety
5.6.5.2 Verify that
communication is present on
the local bus
•
Installation Introduction
Troubleshooting
and Fault
5.6.5.1 Verify on the failing ICC
cabinet that:
Disclaimer
5.6.5 Troubleshooting:
One unit flashes
incorrectly (intensity or
timing)
Operation
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
119
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Troubleshooting and Fault Correction
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
Troubleshooting
and Fault
Operation
Maintenance
Schematics
120
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
The Item column numbers correspond to the numbers that identify parts in illustrations
following each parts list. NS (not shown) indicates that a listed part is not illustrated.
The Description column gives the part name, as well as its dimensions and other
characteristics when appropriate. Indentions show the relationships between assemblies,
subassemblies, and parts.
Item
Part Number
Qty
Note
S1
Assembly
xxxxxxxx
1
A
NS
Part
xxxxxxxx
1
H1
Part or Assembly
Part/Assembly for option 1
xxxxxxxx
2
Part/Assembly for option 2
xxxxxxxx
2
Assembly
xxxxxxxx
1
Part
xxxxxxxx
1
Part
xxxxxxxx
2
T1
Description
Safety
The Part Number column gives the ADB Airfield Solutions part number.
Disclaimer
This subsection describes how to use the illustrated parts list covered later in this section. It
does not provide the actual parts list.
Table of
Contents
To order parts, call ADB Airfield Solutions Customer Service or your local representative.
Use this five-column parts list, and the accompanying illustrations, to describe and locate
parts correctly.
NOTE A
The Quantity column contains the quantity required per unit, assembly, or subassembly. The
code AR (As Required) is used if the part number is a bulk item ordered in quantities or if the
quantity per assembly depends on the product version or model.
Parts
Maintenance
The Note column contains letters that refer to notes at the end of each parts list. Notes
contain special ordering or product/part version information.
Installation Introduction
Parts
6.0 Parts
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Parts
Operation
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
121
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MALSR Parts List
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
6.1 MALSR Parts List
The MALSR/ALSF MCC part number is 44A6850/XXXXXXXX.
Figure 55:
Master Control Cabinet Parts and Diagram
CB2
Circuit breaker, 15 A (AIRPAX #219-2-1-63F-3-15)
57A0047
CB3/4
Circuit breaker, 30 A (AIRPAX #219-2-1-62-3-1-30)
57A0048
Table of
Contents
CB1
Switch, MALSR, 120/240 Vac, 100A (AIRPAX #219-2-1-63F-3-1-100)
57A0050
CB1
Switch, ALSF, 120/240 Vac, 100A (AIRPAX #219-2-0-SW-3-1-100)
57A0046
Ground fault outlet
47A0041
Safety
Interlock switch
DPDT 10A
45A0303
Assembly 44A6842
See Figure
Introduction Installation
MALSR
Parts List
Rotary switch
MALSR
44B1698-1
ALSF
44B1698-2
Lamp, 100 W
(SYLVANIA
#100A125)
48A0065
Lamp socket,
snap-in
49A0116
K1
Cont 2P 30 FLA 120 Vac
Coil
53A0412-30
PCB Assembly
44A6839
See Figure
Operation
K2, K3, K4
Cont 2P 60 FLA 120 Vac
Coil
53A0412-60
PCB1485
1593.13.412F
Maintenance
Varistor (VR1 - VR4)
32A0011
PCB 1486
1593.13.510
PCB 1498
1590.03.480
Parts
Assembly
44A6841
Figure
122
F1
Fuse, 5 A (BUSS AGC-5)
47A0015
F2
Fuse, 15 A (BUSS AGC-15)
47A0016
F3
Fuse, 1 A, S.B. A (BUSS MDL-5)
47A0017
F4 & F5
Fuse 10 A (BUSS MDL-1)
47A0018
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MALSR Parts List
Part Number
Description
Qty
1
1590.03.490
Master J-Bus Board, PCB 1502
1
2
60A4008
Mounting Plate Power Supply MALSR
1
3
60A4009
XFMR Mounting Plate MALSR
1
4
64A0199-4
6-32 X 1/4 Pan Head Phillips
8
5
64A0177-8
10-32 X 1/2 Pan Head Phillips
2
6
64A0245/8
8-32 X 1/2 Hex Head Self Tap
2
7
65A0015-19
10-32 Hex Nut
4
8
66A0026/11
#6 Split Lockwasher
2
9
66A0026/15
#8 Split Lockwasher
4
10
66A0026/17
#10 Split Lockwasher
2
11
66A0039-6
#10 External Lockwasher
2
12
66A0129
Standoff Hex M-F 3/4 X 6-32
8
13
78A0775
Wire to PCB Multipole Connector, 6 Contacts, 3.96mm
1
14
78A0776
Wire to PCB Crimp Housing Connector, 3 Contacts, 3.96mm
1
15
72A0399
Crimp Pin
8
16
97A0001
Power Supply 48VDC 1.0 A
1
16
97A0010
Power Supply 24VDC 1.2 A
1
17
97A0028
LPT45 Switch Mode Power Supply
1
MCC Assembly 44A6839 Diagram
10
7
5
16
3
1
11
17
44A6839
QTY.
DESCRIPTION
1590.03.490
2
60A4008
MOUNTING PLATE POWER SUPPLY MALSR
3
60A4009
XFMR MOUNTING PLATE MALSR
1
4
64A0199-4
6-32 X 1/4 PAN HD PHIL
8
5
64A0177-8
10-32 X 1/2 PAN HD PHIL
MASTER J-BUS BOARD, PCB 1502
1
2
6
64A0245/8
8-32 X 1/2 HX HD SELF TAP
-
65A0015-19
10-32 HX NUT
2
8
66A0026/11
#6 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
8
66A0026/15
#8 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
-
10
66A0026/17
#10 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
2
11
66A0039-6
#10 EXTERNAL LOCKWASHER
2
12
13
66A0129
70A0775
STANDOFF HEX M-F 3/4 X 6-32
Wire to PCB Multipole Connector, 6 Contacts, 3.96mm
14
70A0776
Wire to PCB Crimp Housing Connector, 3 Contacts, 3.96mm
15
72A0399
16
97A0001
16
17
4
1
7
9
14
PART
NUMBER
1
Crimp Pin, 18-24AWG
Operation
ITEM
NO.
8
1
1
8
POWER SUPPLY 48VDC 1A
-
97A0010
POWER SUPPLY 24VDC 1.2
1
97A0028
LPT45 SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY
1
Maintenance
Figure 56:
Table of
Contents
Item
Disclaimer
MCC Assembly 44A6539 Parts
Safety
Table 57:
2
8
Installation Introduction
MALSR
Parts List
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
4
14
12
44A6839
120V MALSR
Parts
13
16
17
2
8
17
4
12
13
14
9
6
2
8
44A6839-2
120V ALSF
4
12
44A6839-1
48V ALSF
13
•
J-bus not used in FAA version.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
123
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MALSR Parts List
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Table 58:
ITEM
MCC Assembly MALSR 44A6842 / ALSF 44A6842/1 Parts
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
Table of
Contents
Safety
1
42A0587
MALSR Switch / Light Panel Label
1
1
42A0609
ALSF Switch / Light Panel Label
1
2
45A0468
Switch Toggle SPDT SLDR LUG 5PCS
1
3
46A0092-6
Rotary SW 30DEG SP 6POS.
1
3
61A0454
Knob, Phenolic, 1/4" Shaft, Pointer
1
4
48A0406
Neon Lamp, Neon IND 110V AMB
4
5
60A4010
Switch / Light Panel BRKT MALSR
1
6
63A0255
Cable Tie Mount Metal
1
6
64A0198-6
6-32 X 3/8 Pan Head Phillips
1
6
66A0026-11
#6 Split Lockwasher
1
6
65A0015-11
#6-32 HX NUT
1
Figure 57:
Introduction Installation
MALSR
Parts List
MCC ALSF/MALSR Assembly 44A6842 Diagram (MALSR Light Panel
Label Shown)
4
2
1
4
4
5
4
Operation
3
Maintenance
Parts
6
124
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MALSR Parts List
QTY.
1
49A0361
Socket Relay 8 Pins
10
2
49A0363
Socket Relay 11 Pins
1
3
53A0436
120 Vac 50/60HZ 12 AMP SPDT
1
4
53A0437
24 Vdc 10 AMP DPDT
4
5
53A0442
Relay, 11 Pin, 3DPDT, 12A
1
6
53A0443
Relay Time Delay
3
7
53A0447
Relay DPDT, 48VDC Coil, 8 Pins
10
8
53A0450
Relay DPDT 120VAC 50/60HZ 12AMP
10
9
60A4007
Relay Mounting Plate MALSR
1
10
64A0169-16
4-40 X 1" Pan Head Phillips
22
11
64A0169-6
#4-40 X 3/8 Pan Head Phillips
6
12
66A0015-7
#4 Flatwasher SS
6
13
66A0026-7
#4 Split Lockwasher
24
14
72A0066
Term BLK 22-10AWG 600V 50A,Use W/72A0067
33
15
72A0067
Term BLK End, Flat Base, Mates W/72A0066
3
Figure 58:
14
15
MCC Assembly 44A6841 ALSF/MALSR 120V Diagrams
4
9
Disclaimer
DESCRIPTION
Table of
Contents
PART NUMBER
Safety
ITEM
MCC Assembly 44A6841 Parts
Installation Introduction
MALSR
Parts List
Table 59:
14
15
9
3
8
1
1
Operation
K13
2
6
K14
8
5
Maintenance
K15
2
5
11
12 13
11
12 13
14
15
14
15
44A6841
120V ASSEMBLY
MALSR
14
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
15
44A6841-2
120V ASSEMBLY
ALSF
Parts
15
125
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MALSR Parts List
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Disclaimer
Figure 59:
MCC Assembly 44A6841 ALSF 48V Diagram
9
14
15
7
1
Table of
Contents
K13
K14
2
7
Safety
K15
5
Introduction Installation
MALSR
Parts List
11
12 13
14
15
44A6841-1
48V ASSEMBLY
ALSF
6.1.0.1 MALSR Master Control
Cabinet Specific Parts List
See Table . This subsection provides master control cabinet parts applicable only to the
MALSR system.
Operation
The MALSR master control cabinet part number is 44A6850/XXXXXXXX.
Table 60:
Item
Maintenance
20
21
Description
Circuit breaker, 70 A (AIRPAX #219-2-1-62F-3-1-70),
MALSR
Contactor, 70 A, 120 Vac (TELEMECANIQUE #LC1-050BK),
MALSR
Part Number
Quantity
57A0049
1
53A0252
3
Note
Parts
126
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MALSR Parts List
Refer to instruction manual 96A0119, Type FAP PAR-56 Approach Light for parts list and
diagrams for the steady burning light assembly.
6.1.1.2 MALSR PAR-38
Lampholder Assembly Parts
List
PAR-38 parts apply only to the MALSR system.
Table 61:
Description
Part Number
Quantity
Note
1
Lamp (150W PAR-38)
48A0447
1
2
PAR-38 lampholder, PAR/SP
44A0094
1
3
Slip fitter
62B0528-2
1
4
PAR-38 tower mounting adapter (FAC)
62B0537
1
B
5
Lampholder assembly
44C1683
1
A
Safety
Item
Table of
Contents
6.1.1.1 MALSR PAR-56
Lampholder Assembly Parts
List
Disclaimer
6.1.1 Steady Burning
Elevated Light Assembly
Parts List
PAR-38 Lampholder
Operation
Figure 60:
Installation Introduction
MALSR
Parts List
1. NOTE A: The lampholder assembly includes the PAR-38 lampholder (Item 2) and the slip fitter (Item 3). The lamp (item 1) is a separate line item
and is not supplied with the lampholder assembly (item 5).
2. NOTE B: The mounting adapter (FAC) (item 4) is used in conjunction with the slipfitter (item 3), when mounting the PAR-38 holder to a fiber glass
or aluminum tower cross arms hub.
1
5
5
2
Maintenance
3
Parts
4
Aluminum Tower Mount
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Fiberglass Tower Mount
127
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MALSR Parts List
Disclaimer
6.1.2 MALSR/ALSF Inpavement Flasher Parts
List
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
It is recommended to create a sufficiently large stock of spare parts to maintain the fittings. It
will mainly consist of consumables like lamps, O-ring gaskets, etc. Other components that
may need replacement, such as prisms, prism gaskets, terminal blocks and hardware even
as sub-assemblies should be stocked in smaller quantities. It is recommended to store at
least one complete fitting, FFL9C0000000.
Table of
Contents
The table below gives for each screw used in the FFL 12", the reference to the type of screw,
the tool to use, and the type of "Loctite" when needed:
Screw
Tool
Loctite
Torque
Safety
A
Socket hex, 3/8”, 
J.9/16LA
Loctite 270
190 in-lb (21 Nm)
7870.05.110
B5 – screw TFC M5X10 DIN 965-Z INOX A2
Pozidriv2, RD.2
Loctite 270
31 in-lb (3.5 Nm)
7870.05.110
C2 – Screw TFC M5X10 DIN 965-Z INOX A2
Pozidriv2, RD.2
No
31 in-lb (3.5 Nm)
C4 – Screw TFC M4X10 DIN 965-Z INOX A2
Pozidriv2, RD.2
No
30 in-lb (3.3 Nm)
D7 – screw TFC M5X10 DIN 965-Z INOX A2
Pozidriv2, RD.2
No
31 in-lb (3.5 Nm)
No
190 in-lb (21 Nm)
Introduction Installation
MALSR
Parts List
Screws delivered for installation of adapter ring Socket hex, 3/8”, 
on deep base
J.9/16LA
In the table below you will find the commercially available spare parts and main assemblies of
the FFL light fitting (the part numbers refer to Figure 61)
Operation
Maintenance
Parts
128
Ref.
ADB part
number
Description
Qty used
in fitting
Order
quantity
(Per xx)
B
1440.02.300
FFL Cover assy, including:
1
1
B1
4072.02.010
•
FFL machined cover
1
1
B2
7080.90.710
•
F-range 12 O-ring gasket
1
1
B3
4072.06.720
•
FFL prism kit consisting of
1
1
B3a
4072.02.030
- FFL sleeve gasket for prism
1
1
B3b
4072.01.520
- FFL prism
1
1
B3c
4072.02.060
- FFL flat seal for Prism
1
1
B4
4072.02.070
- FFL prism keeper plate
1
1
B5
64A0936-13
- Pan head screw M5 x 13 - Stainless Steel - DIN
7985-Z
10
100
C1
2990.82.673
FFL flashing lamp 60J - 400V (see note 1.)
1
1
C2
64A0936-13
Pan head screw M5 x 13 - Stainless Steel - DIN 7985-Z
5
100
C3
4072.20.810
Trigger PCB (see Note 2.)
1
1
C4
4072.02.181
Lamp PCB (see Note 2.) - does not include the lamp
1
1
C5
64A0964-10
Screw THRD M4X10 Stainless Steel
D
1440.02.310
D1
4072.02.010
D2
5
100
FFL inner inner cover assembly including :
1
1
•
Machined FFL inner cover
1
1
7080.90.650
•
O-ring seal between top cover and shallow base, for FRange 12"
1
10
D3
6126.01.330
•
PG16 cable entry IP54 cable diameter 10.5 to 16 mm
1
10
D4
4072.03.980
•
5-pole plug assembly
1
1
D5
4070.77.150
•
Pressure release screw
1
10
D6
63B0267-011
•
O-ring for the pressure release screw
D7
64A0925-10
•
Screw TFC M5 X 10 Stainless Steel - DIN 965-Z
1
Former version of the lamp, with fast-on connector on the trigger wire: 2990.82.671.
2
Order one Trigger PCB and one Lamp PCB to replace former FFL PCB ref. 4072.16.690.
1
100
10
100
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
MALSR Parts List
Disclaimer
Exploded Inset Light
Parts
Maintenance
Operation
Installation Introduction
MALSR
Parts List
Safety
Table of
Contents
Figure 61:
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
129
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Optional Parts
Disclaimer
6.2 Optional Parts
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Refer below for optional parts.
Table 62:
In-pavement Flasher
Item
Description
Part Number
Quantity Note
Table of
Contents
26
6-core cable
6104.90.206
AR
NS
Connector kit, in-pavement flasher, male plug
70A0618
1
NS
Connector kit, in-pavement flasher, female
receptacle
70A0619
1
A
NOTE A: One 6-core cable is needed with each in-pavement flasher. Please specify total length of
cable required (in feet) when ordering.
NS: Not shown
AR: As required
Safety
Figure 62:
PAR-56 or PAR-38 elevated lights
Item
Description
Part Number
Quantity Note
Introduction Installation
Optional
Parts
NS
Adapter sleeve
62B0537
1
NS
Flasher tester
44D1686-1
1
NS
Frangible coupling
A
1
EMT Frangible coupling
44B0180
Frangible coupling (Type F2)
62B0064
NS
Lightning arrestor
NS
Power transformer, 15 kVA for MALSR only
47A0019
2
44D1685-1
1
NOTE A: Used only on aluminum-tower cross arms to mount PAR-56 or PAR-38 lights, or on fiberglass
tower for PAR-38 lampholders.
NS: Not Shown
AR: As required
Operation
6.2.1 Optional Items
Table 63:
Reference
Misc Parts
Description
Maintenance
Code number
Order qty
Over-voltage protection cartridge for supply
phase 
VAL-MS230ST
6134.03.050
1
Over-voltage protection cartridge for supply
neutral 
F-MS 12T
6134.03.060
1
Parts
130
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
External Wiring Diagram, 400V Sequenced Flasher System- FAA MALSR diagram
SHIELD IS CUT OFF
AT END OF CABLE
INPUT
120/240 VAC, 60HZ
120 VAC (L1A)
NEUTRAL
120 VAC (L1B)
REMOTE POWER
(NOTE 1)
NOT USED
LOW
MED
HIGH
ON
FLASHER ON/OFF
COMMON
15KVA XF
120/75/50VAC
NEUTRAL
120/75/50VAC
LOW
HIGH
MED
210 VAC
216 VAC
222 VAC
228 VAC
234 VAC
240 VAC
246 VAC
252 VAC
X1
X2
X3
H3
H2
H1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FEEDBACK #1
FEEDBACK #2
FEEDBACK #3
FEEDBACK #4
NEUTRAL
GND
2 AWG, 600V
TB1
4 AWG, 600V
XFMR COM
MED
HIGH
LOW
SPARE
SPARE
120VAC (L1A SWITCHED)
NEUTRAL
120 VAC (L1B SWITCHED)
THIS TAP NEEDS TO BE MOVED
TO THE CLOSEST TAP VALUE
AS MEASURED BETWEEN L1A
AND L1B ON TB1
4 AWG
TB2
1 2 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TB1
LAMP ANODE BLK-2 (BRN)
12 IN.
STEADY
BURNING
LIGHTS
FLASHING
LIGHTS
P1 P3
+ - 0V + -
400V
TRIG BLK-1 (BLU)
TRIG
393 FT. (120 m) MAX.
UEL ELEVATED FLASHING FIXTURE INTERCONNECTING WIRING
LAMP
UNIT
FIELD SPLICE
(IN PAVEMENT ONLY)
LAMP
UNIT
FIELD SPLICE
(IN PAVEMENT ONLY)
LAMP
UNIT
FIELD SPLICE
(IN PAVEMENT ONLY)
FIELD SPLICE
(IN PAVEMENT ONLY)
TB 2
TB 2
TB 2
TB 2
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
CABINET
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
CABINET
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
CABINET
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
CABINET
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
CABINET
P1 P3 INPUT
+ - 0V + - 0V 1 2 PE PE
8 AWG
4 AWG
MALSR REMOTE CONTROL
USING THE MCC 120VAC
REMOTE POWER
LAMP ANODE BLK-2 (BRN)
2
FCU
INDIVIDUAL
CONTROL
CABINET
TB 2
P1 P3 INPUT
+ - 0V + - 0V 1 2 PE PE
0V
3
1
LAMP
UNIT
FIELD SPLICE
(IN PAVEMENT ONLY)
PCB4
4
389.5 FT. (118m) MAX.
30 IN.
393 FT. (120 m) MAX.
LAMP
UNIT
MASTER CONTROL
CABINET
PE
CAB
_
INTERLOCK - BLK-3 (BLK)
CAB
+
POTENTIAL EARTH GRN/YEL (GRN/YEL)
PE
INTERLOCK - BLK-4 (BLK)
5
TRIG
TB2
SHIELD
TB1
FCU
INDIVIDUAL
CONTROL
CABINET
FFL IN-PAVEMENT FLASHING FIXTURE INTERCONNECTING WIRING
TB1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
400V
TRIG BLK-1 (BLU)
J1
PCB2
(LMC PCB)
9
10
11
12
13
14
PE
CAB
_
INTERLOCK - BLK-3 (BLK)
CAB
+
POTENTIAL EARTH GRN/YEL (GRN/YEL)
PE
INTERLOCK - BLK-4 (BLK)
Table of
Contents
4 AWG, 600V
TB2
SHIELD
PLUG/RECEPTACLE
P1 P3 INPUT
+ - 0V + - 0V 1 2 PE PE
8 AWG
Safety
LAPTOP
SEE NOTE 2
SEE NOTE 2
FIELD WATERPROOF SPLICE
P1 P3 INPUT
+ - 0V + - 0V 1 2 PE PE
8 AWG
Installation Introduction
Schematics
DONGLE
MAINTENANCE CONNECTION
SHIELD IS CUT OFF AT SPLICE
P1 P3 INPUT
+ - 0V + - 0V 1 2 PE PE
8 AWG
8 AWG
SEE NOTE 3
Operation
Figure 63:
Disclaimer
7.0 Schematics
SEE NOTE 4
10 AWG (MIN), 600V
TB2-1 REMOTE POWER
TB2-4 MED
S3
TB2-5 HIGH
S4
CAUTION! ONLY S1, OR S2, OR S3
CAN BE CLOSED AT ONE TIME:
HIGH = S1+S4 CLOSED
MED = S2+S4 CLOSED
LOW = S3+S4 CLOSED
JUNCTION
BOX
8 AWG
8 AWG
JUNCTION
BOX
TO INPUT #1
TO INPUT #2
TB2-7 FLASHER ON/OFF
TO NEXT
FLASHER
JUNCTION
BOX
8 AWG
JUNCTION
BOX
8 AWG
Parts
TB2-3 LOW
S2
8 AWG
JUNCTION
BOX
P1 (+)
P1 (-)
P1 (0V)
P3 (+)
P3 (-)
P3 (0V)
ICC
Parts
S1
18 PAR 56 LAMPS OR UP TO 45 PAR 38 LAMPS
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
(+)
(-)
JUNCTION BOX
WIRING DETAIL
CONTROLLED COPY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Unauthorized duplication of this document in whole or part is prohibited.
Initialed in RED ink below indicatesauthorized copy.
(+)
(-)
(0V)
GND
1 2 3 4 5
APPROVED BY:
(L1A SWITCHED)
(L1B SWITCHED)
DATE:
(0V)
E
3840
NOTE UPDATES
BE
D
3709
TITLE BLOCK UPDATE
DTR 14AUG12
06MAR13
977 Gahanna Parkway, Columbus, Ohio 43230
Telephone: 614-861-1304, Fax: 614-864-2069
C
02140 NOTE REVISIONS
BE
09JAN09
DRAWING TITLE:
B
02129 POST INSTALLATION UPDATES BE
09DEC08
A
----
BE
04NOV08
DRAWN
BY
REV
DATE
EXTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM,
400V SEQUENCED FLASHER
SYSTEM - FAA MALSR
REV
LEVEL
8 AWG
(L1A SWITCHED)
(L1B SWITCHED)
Schematics
TB2
NOTES:
1. REMOTE POWER SOURCE IS EITHER 120 VAC, +48VDC, OR +24VDC DEPENDING ON OPTION ORDERED WITH MASTER
CONTROL CABINET. REMOTE POWER MAY ALSO BE EXTERNALLY SOURCED.
2. FIRST COLOR IS FOR CABLE 89A0290/5 (ALPHA WIRE # 65405CY). SECOND COLOR, IN PARENTHESIS, IS FOR CABLE
6104.22.820, 5C+SHIELD, 14AWG, 600V.
FOR FIXTURE TO FCU LINE LENGTH UP TO 131 FT (40m), USE 14 AWG WIRE.
- FOR FIXTURE TO FCU LINE LENGTH UP TO 213 FT (65m), USE 12 AWG WIRE.
- FOR FIXTURE TO FCU LINE LENGTH UP TO 328 FT (100m), USE 10 AWG WIRE.
- FOR FIXTURE TO FCU LINE LENGTH UP TO 393 FT (120m), USE 8 AWG WIRE.
3. SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING BETWEEN MASTER AND EACH ICC MUST BE MANHATTAN WIRE M8628010, 18AWG,
TRIAD, SHIELDED, 600V CABLE or ADB-APPROVED EQUAL.
4. LAST INDIVIDUAL CONTROL CABINET (FARTHEST FROM MASTER) WILL NOT HAVE ANY WIRES CONNECTED TO P3.
MASTER PCB4
P1
+ - 0V
TB1
- MAY ALSO INCLUDE IN-PAVEMENT MALSR FIXTURES ACCORDING TO FAA-E-2952
(ALSF) OR FAA-E-2968 (MALSR).
- THESE FIXTURES ARE CONNECTED VIA A MATCHING VOLTAGE-VOLTAGE TX.
PRODUCTION RELEASE
ECO
NUMBER
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS:
REVISION DESCRIPTION
DRAWN BY:
DRAWN DATE:
04NOV08
BE
Information contained on this drawing is to be used expressly in accord with
purpose for which it was submitted. Any disclosure of this information is strictly
prohibited except as ADB Airfield Solutions, LLC. may otherwise agree in writing.
CopyrightÓ 2012 ADB Airfield Solutions
.
SCALE:
N/A
DRAWING NUMBER:
43A3511
SHEET NUMBER:
1 OF 1
REV.
E
131
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
ALSF External Wiring Diagram, 400V Sequenced Flasher System- FAA ALSF/SSALR diagrams
SHIELD IS CUT OFF AT SPLICE
DONGLE
LAPTOP
S1
S2
+
Introduction Installation
Schematics
S3
+48VDC
POWER
SUPPLY
-
S4
S5
TB2-2
ALSF/SSALR
TB2-3
LOW
TB2-4
MED
TB2-5
HIGH
TB2-7
FLASHERS ON
TB2-8
COMMON
Operation
CAUTION! ONLY S2, OR S3, OR S4,
CAN BE CLOSED AT ONE TIME:
CLOSE S1 FOR ALSF MODE
OPEN S1 FOR SSALR MODE
LOW = S2+S5 CLOSED
MED = S3+S5 CLOSED
HIGH = S4+S5 CLOSED
NOTE: FOR ALSF MODE ONLY, DELETE
EXTERNAL SWITCH S1 AND CONNECT
A JUMPER FROM TB2-2 TO TB2-7.
REMOTE POWER
(NOTE 1)
ALSF/SSALR
LOW
MED
HIGH
ON
FLASHER ON/OFF
COMMON
FEEDBACK #1
FEEDBACK #2
FEEDBACK #3
FEEDBACK #4
NEUTRAL
GND
TB2
1 2 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TB1
LAMP ANODE BLK-2 (BRN)
TRIG BLK-1 (BLU)
LAMP
UNIT
PCB4
FLASHING
LIGHTS
P1 P3
+ - 0V + -
SEE NOTE 4
FCU
INDIVIDUAL
CONTROL
CABINET
400V
TRIG BLK-1 (BLU)
TRIG
393 FT. (120 m) MAX.
UEL ELEVATED FLASHING FIXTURE INTERCONNECTING WIRING
LAMP
UNIT
LAMP
UNIT
FIELD SPLICE
(IN-PAVEMENT ONLY)
FIELD SPLICE
(IN-PAVEMENT ONLY)
LAMP
UNIT
FIELD SPLICE
(IN-PAVEMENT ONLY)
FIELD SPLICE
(IN-PAVEMENT ONLY)
TB 2
TB 2
TB 2
TB 2
TB 2
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
CABINET
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
CABINET
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
CABINET
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
CABINET
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
CABINET
6 AWG
P1 P3 INPUT
+ - 0V + - 0V 1 2 PE PE
8 AWG
P1 P3 INPUT
+ - 0V + - 0V 1 2 PE PE
8 AWG
P1 P3 INPUT
+ - 0V + - 0V 1 2 PE PE
8 AWG
P1 P3 INPUT
+ - 0V + - 0V 1 2 PE PE
8 AWG
8 AWG
SEE NOTE 5
SEE NOTE 3
10AWG (MIN), 600V
TO NEXT
FLASHER
Parts
NOTES:
1. REMOTE POWER SOURCE IS EITHER 120 VAC, +48VDC, OR +24VDC DEPENDING ON OPTION
ORDERED WITH MASTER CONTROL CABINET. REMOTE POWER MAY ALSO BE EXTERNALLY
SOURCED.
2. FIRST COLOR IS FOR CABLE 89A0290/5 (ALPHA WIRE # 65405CY,). SECOND COLOR, IN
PARENTHESIS, IS FOR CABLE 6104.22.820 5C+SHIELD, 14AWG, 600V.
- FOR FIXTURE TO FCU LINE LENGTH UP TO 131 FT (40m), USE 14 AWG WIRE.
- FOR FIXTURE TO FCU LINE LENGTH UP TO 213 FT (65m), USE 12 AWG WIRE.
- FOR FIXTURE TO FCU LINE LENGTH UP TO 328 FT (100m), USE 10 AWG WIRE.
- FOR FIXTURE TO FCU LINE LENGTH UP TO 393 FT (120m), USE 8 AWG WIRE.
3. SERIAL COMMUNICATION WIRING BETWEEN MASTER AND EACH ICC MUST BE MANHATTAN WIRE
M8628010, 18AWG, TRIAD, SHIELDED, 600V CABLE or ADB-APPROVED EQUAL.
4. CONNECTIONS SHOWN ON THIS PRINT ASSUME THAT THE MASTER IS PHYSICALLY LOCATED AT
EITHER END OF THE ROW OF ICC'S. IF THE MASTER IS PHYSICALLY LOCATED IN THE MIDDLE
AREA OF THE ICC'S, CONNECT P1 TO ONE SECTION OF ICC's (AS SHOWN) AND THEN CONNECT
P3 TO THE OTHER SECTION OF ICC's.
5. LAST INDIVIDUAL CONTROL CABINET (FARTHEST FROM MASTER) WILL NOT HAVE ANY WIRES
CONNECTED TO P3.
8 AWG
8 AWG
JUNCTION
BOX
TO INPUT #1
TO INPUT #2
Parts
JUNCTION
BOX
Schematics
132
LAMP ANODE BLK-2 (BRN)
2
1
LAMP
UNIT
P1 P3 INPUT
+ - 0V + - 0V 1 2 PE PE
0V
3
TRIG
FIELD SPLICE
(IN-PAVEMENT ONLY)
TB1
4
5
6
7
SPARE
8
SPARE
9
120VAC (L1A SWITCHED) 10
NEUTRAL
11
120 VAC (L1B SWITCHED)
12
4
FFL IN-PAVEMENT FLASHING FIXTURE INTERCONNECTING WIRING
MASTER CONTROL
CABINET
PE
CAB
_
INTERLOCK - BLK-3 (BLK)
CAB
+
POTENTIAL EARTH GRN/YEL (GRN/YEL)
PE
INTERLOCK - BLK-4 (BLK)
5
400V
TB2
SHIELD
TB1
FCU
INDIVIDUAL
CONTROL
CABINET
389.5 FT. (118m) MAX.
30 IN.
393 FT. (120 m) MAX.
12 IN.
J1
PCB2
(LMC PCB)
9
10
11
12
13
14
PE
CAB
_
INTERLOCK - BLK-3 (BLK)
CAB
+
POTENTIAL EARTH GRN/YEL (GRN/YEL)
PE
INTERLOCK - BLK-4 (BLK)
JUNCTION
BOX
8 AWG
8 AWG
JUNCTION
BOX
8 AWG
JUNCTION
BOX
ICC
P1 (+)
P1 (-)
P1 (0V)
P3 (+)
P3 (-)
P3 (0V)
Safety
ALSF REMOTE CONTROL USING AN
EXTERNAL 48VDC SOURCE
120 VAC (L1A)
NEUTRAL
120 VAC (L1B)
SEE NOTE 2
TB2
SHIELD
PLUG/RECEPTACLE
MASTER PCB4
TB2
INPUT
120/240 VAC, 60HZ
SHIELD IS CUT OFF
AT END OF CABLE
SEE NOTE 2
FIELD WATERPROOF SPLICE
P1
+ - 0V
(+)
(-)
JUNCTION BOX
WIRING DETAIL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CONTROLLED COPY
Unauthorized duplication of this document in whole or part is prohibited.
Initialed in RED ink below indicatesauthorized copy.
TB1
Table of
Contents
8 AWG, 600V
MAINTENANCE CONNECTION
Disclaimer
Figure 64:
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
(+)
(-)
(0V)
GND
1 2 3 4 5
APPROVED BY:
E
3840
SEE ECO: ADDED NOTES
BE
D
3709
REPAIR TEXT
DTR 14AUG12
C
3616
SEE ECO
AV
30MAR12
ADDED NOTE 3 FOR PCB4
BE
10JAN12
DRAWING TITLE:
BE
03FEB09
DRAWN
BY
REV
DATE
EXTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM,
400V SEQUENCED FLASHER
SYSTEM- FAA ALSF/SSALR
B
3278
A
2140
06MAR13
SERIAL COMM. CABLE
8 AWG
(L1A SWITCHED)
(L1B SWITCHED)
(L1A SWITCHED)
(L1B SWITCHED)
DATE:
(0V)
PRODUCTION RELEASE
REV
ECO
LEVEL NUMBER
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS:
REVISION DESCRIPTION
DRAWN BY:
DRAWN DATE:
BE
04NOV08
Information contained on this drawing is to be used expressly in accord with
purpose for which it was submitted. Any disclosure of this information is strictly
prohibited except as ADB Airfield Solutions, Ilc. may otherwise agree in writing.
CopyrightÓ 2012 ADB Airfield Solutions, llc.
977 Gahanna Parkway, Columbus, Ohio 43230
Telephone: 614-861-1304, Fax: 614-864-2069
SCALE:
N/A
DRAWING NUMBER:
43A3546
SHEET NUMBER:
1 OF 1
REV.
E
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
FIRST CABINET- ICC 3
FCU-middle
FCU-right
PCB1487
PCB1487
LMC
PCB1485
P4
SLAVE 2
P2
Table of
Contents
PCB1487
P4
SLAVE 1
MCC
P4
SLAVE 3
P2
P4
P1
P3
Safety
FCU-left
Disclaimer
Local Bus Control
Installation Introduction
Schematics
Figure 65:
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
MIDDLE CABINET- ICC 3
FCU-right
PCB1487
PCB1487
P4
SLAVE 5
P4
SLAVE 6
P2
P4
P1
P3
Leave straps W11,
W25 & W28 in these
FCU’s (first and last
FCU in LOCAL BUS
communication line).
(Remove W11, W25
& W28 on all other
FCU’S & W15, W16 &
W18 on the LMC)
Operation
PCB1487
P4
SLAVE 4
FCU-middle
Parts
FCU-left
LAST CABINET- ICC 3
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
FCU-right
PCB1487
PCB1487
Parts
PCB1487
P4
SLAVE 7
FCU-middle
P4
SLAVE 8
P4
SLAVE 9
P2
P4
P1
P3
Schematics
FCU-left
133
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
Disclaimer
Figure 66:
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Internal Wiring Diagram 400 V ICC
CONN.MOLEX NC 6118.25.003
PIN MOLEX NC 6118.25.000
INTERLOCK SWITCH (ON-OFF-ON)
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Table of
Contents
POWER SUPPLY
ASTEC LPT 45
+15V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
-15V
PH
N
DS18S20
1
GND
6 x 0.75 mm2
H05V-K
2
DQ
HSC100
3
1500 ohm
V
DD
770ITT22117 0,22 mm2
Safety
H05V-K 0,75 mm2
H05V-K 0,75 mm2
P6; NOT
USED
N PE HEAT
Introduction Installation
Schematics
C1
+
-
-
P5
P3
HEATING
MOV
-15V
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
+15V
P7 (NOT USED)
TB1
RED
PE -
-
TB1 (NOT USED)
5 4 3 2 1
P1
P2
TB3
+
PE
CABCAB+
PE
400V
TRIG
FCU PCB
RET
TRIG
-
DOOR
H07V-K 1,5 mm2
BLUE OR WHITE
L1
+
TB2
TB4
P7
P6
P4
J1
N PE PH
N PE PH
FCC
10P
DB9
TO ELEVATED OR IN-PAVEMANT
FLASHING FIXTURE
TO DONGLE (WHEN USED)
Flatcable 10 W
Flatcable 10 W
P2 (NOT USED)
Operation
OPTIONAL MONITORED MOV'S
Flatc.conn. 10 F
770ITT22117 0,22 mm2
6116.69.025
12
14
12
14
11
FCC
10P
Parts
LOCAL BUS
INTERFACE
P1
+ - 0V
Parts
H05V-K
0,75 mm2
11
FCC
10P
PCB1498
P3
4 mm2
+ - 0V
J1 (NOT USED)
1
SCHAFFNER
P'
P
Schematics
N'
N
LOAD
E
LINE
H05V-K
0,75 mm2
4 AT
2
H05V-K
0,75 mm2
H07V-K
4 mm2
CONTROLLED COPY
4 AT
Unauthorized duplication of this document in whole or part is
prohibited. Initialed in RED ink below indicatesauthorized copy.
APPROVED BY:
DATE:
OPTIONAL
RECEPTACLE
L
N
2 AT
PE
1 2
3709
UPDATE TITLE BLOCK
C
2140
NOTE REVISIONS
BE
09JAN09
DRAWING TITLE:
B
- - - - - POST INSTALLATION UPDATESBE
09DEC08
A
- - - - - PRODUCTION RELEASE
BE
03NOV08
DRAWN
BY
REV
DATE
INTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM,
400V INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
CABINET (FCU)
REV
ECO
LEVEL NUMBER
H05V-K
0,75 mm²
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS:
Input Max.264VAC
10 mm²
134
D
ADB Airfield Solutions
977 Gahanna Parkway, Columbus, Ohio 43230
DTR 14AUG12 Telephone: 614-861-1304, Fax: 614-864-2069
REVISION DESCRIPTION
DRAWN BY:
DRAWN DATE:
BE
03NOV08
Information contained on this drawing is to be used expressly in accord with
purpose for which it was submitted. Any disclosure of this information is strictly
prohibited except as ADB Airfield Solutions, llc. may otherwise agree in writing.
CopyrightÓ 2012 ADB Airfield Solutions
.
SCALE:
SHEET NUMBER:
N/A
DRAWING NUMBER:
1 OF 1
REV.
43A3512
D
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Internal MALSR Wiring Diagram 400 V MCC
Disclaimer
Figure 67:
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
(WIRING SIDE OF PANEL SHOWN)
PUR
"ON/OFF"
WHT
GRN
("ON/OFF" SWITCH)
2
133
2
1
308
3
2
310
5-
OUT-
LOW
7
131-NEUTRAL
507 (SS-9)
132-TRANSF LO
2
506 (SS-10)
133-TRANSF MED
3
134-TRANSF HI
4
135-TRANSF (L1)
5
136-FLSH 120V (L1)
6
137-FLSH 120V (L2)
GRY
GRY
304
VR3
A2
BLU
12
120VAC (L1B SWITCHED)
217
TO PCB2-P2
BRN
P3
PCB4
(1593.13.510)
P2
805
P2
PCB3
(1590.03.480)
P1
801
805
800
PUR
ORG
BLU
YEL
YEL
WHT
BRN
RED
GRY
BRN
P9
Operation
WHT
BRN
WHT
BRN
WHT
ORG
5
6
YEL
4
YEL
ORG
10
7
9
8
12
YEL
ORG
Parts
WHT
K13
BLU
2
508
Parts
11
YEL
3
1 11
YEL
GRY
PUR
ORG
ORG
10
PUR
YEL
WHT
PUR
ORG
BLU
BLU
GRY
9
WHT
BRN
24VDC
GND
NEUTRAL
FEEDBACK #4
FEEDBACK #3
FEEDBACK #2
TB2
APPROVED BY:
804
YEL
GRY
7
NOTE: RELAYS SHOWN DE-ENERGIZED
Schematics
12
GRY
7
1
2
CONTROLLED COPY
Unauthorized duplication of this document in whole or part is prohibited.
Initialed in RED ink below indicatesauthorized copy.
ORG
120VAC
8
5
6
4
3
BLU
1
2
3
6
K9-TO-K12
SCHEMATIC :
PUR
100 & 400 WIRE NO.S USE 16 AWG.
200's: USE 10 AWG.
300's: USE 6 AWG.
500's: 22AWG, WHT, 200° C (SAS # 89A0002/9 or equal);
600: 22AWG, BLK, 200° C (SAS # 89A0002/10 or equal);
800's: 16AWG, GRN/YEL, UL1015, 600V, 105° C (SAS # 89A0163/6 or equal);
COLORED WIRES: 18AWG, UL1007, 300V, 80° C (SAS # 89A0207/X: "/1" = BRN,
"/2" = RED, "/3" = ORG, "/4" = YEL, "/5" = GRN, "/6 = BLU, "/7" = PUR, "/8" = GRY,
"/9" = WHT, "/10" = BLK or equal).
K5-TO-K8
SCHEMATIC :
FEEDBACK #1
WIRE SIZES:
11
K1-3 COILS
F4
K4
8 THRU 10
IMPORTANT ! ON EXISTING ASSEMBLY WIRING,
MOVE "K1" AND "K2" WIRES 132 & 134 FROM
THEIR CONTACTORS TO THEIR RESPECTIVE COILS
AT "A1".
-RELAYS K1, K2, K3, & K4 SHOWN DE-ENERGIZED.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
BLU
BLU
ASSEMBLY NOTES:
8
117
X
RIBBON CABLE
ASSY'S (3)
TO PCB3-P3
BRN
8
BLU
804
FLASHER ON/OFF
12
X
WHT - TO "ON/OFF" SW-4
601 - TO "SEL. SW." COM
802
HI
6
11
0N
11 HIGH
114
PUR
PUR
YEL
YEL
ORG
ORG
10 MED
5 HIGH
LOW
4 MED
ORG
MED
LOW
7
0
BRN
BRN
9
8
141 9
140 10
YEL - TO "HI" LED
GRN - TO "ON/OFF" SW-6
119
120VAC
3 LOW
146
TOP
PANEL
SEE DETAIL "A" FOR
J5 CONNECTIONS
BRN
YEL
6
RED
WHT
BRN
GRY
PUR
GRY
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BRN
8
2 OFF
LOW RELAY
MED RELAY
HIGH RELAY
FLSHR ON RELAY
GND
120VAC
NEUTRAL
NOT USED
ORG
X
BLU
7
YEL
7A
COM
PUR
1 REMOTE
BRN
P5
(1593.13.412)
BRN
5
BLU
DETAIL "B" - TB3 CONNECTIONS:
DETAIL "A" - J5 CONNECTIONS:
(TB7-2)
S5
TO PCB4-P2
PCB2
TB1
J5
PUR
YEL
1A
COM
ORG
PUR
J5
BLU
SELECTOR SWITCH SCHEMATIC:
9
J5
8
(TB7-3)
GRY
"K" RELAY NO.S
(8 PLC.S)
J5
GRN
146
10
ORG
144
141
J5
11
143
140
2
BLU
YEL
A2
507
804
BLU
YEL
WHT
LOW
BLK
145
114
140
PUR
K3
A2
802
115
WHT
A1
8
SEE DETAIL "B"
PUR
A1
BLU
M
1
1
TB3
0
116
HOUR METER
MED
GRY
GRN
WHT
INPUT
115
K2
BLU
109
SPARE
A1
GRN
BLK
GRY
BLU
WHT
BRN
YEL
RED
DC SUPPLY
F3
130
P2
10 Ω, 25W RESISTOR
ADB# 15A0205
(HS SOLDER JOINTS)
600
501
502
503
504
CONN1
TB2-7
12
WHT
114
129
A2
BRN
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
WHT
216
110
F4 10A
GRN
GFI
P1
GRN
117
SPARE
3
BRN
BRN
FLASHER
POWER
VR4
("HI" LED)
506
TO PCB1-P6
PUR
YEL
ORG
BLU
111
F5
HIGH
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
TO PCB2-P5
126
K1
N
GRY
118
BLK
INPUT
MAINTENANCE
LAMP
PS2
NEUTRAL
112
F2 15A
128
127
11
BRN
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
WHT
505
508
COM
601 (TO J5-6)
75 Ω, 25W RESISTOR
ADB# 15A0206
(HS SOLDER JOINTS)
803
10 120VAC (L1A SWITCHED)
11
3 SEL 10
4 SW 9
8
5
6 7
50
214
INTERLOCK SWITCH (ON-OFF-ON)
131
LINE
124
201
6
5
117 A1
CB2
15A
126
209
215
SPARE
COM
1 12
2
503
TO PCB2-P1
PUR
125
212
213
S2
F1 5A
209
SPARE
GRY
123
211
7
8
9
GRY
GND
NEUTRAL
BUSS
VR2
208
214
218
2
207
305
210
502
BRN
207
211
600
501
PUR
4
GRY
302
1
303
VR1
EARTH
GROUND
LINE
131
2
206
206
136
6
208
137
303
3
K4
"LOW"
800
ORG
BRN
CB3
30A
LOAD
P6
(1590.03.490)
CONTROL PANEL
"MED"
801
BLU
BLU
BLU
120VAC (L1B)
PCB1
TB7
7
70A
LOAD
304
210
302
7
311
BLK
2
5
YEL
1
NEUTRAL
135
GRY
GRY
120VAC (L1A)
6
309
NEUTRAL
120 /
240VAC
INPUT
LINE
5
6
315
314
2 THRU
207
301
5
317
307
CB1
100A POWER
DISCONNECT
301
6
315
ORG
BLK
305
TB1
5
LOAD
306
4
20
505
Safety
1
TB7
7
S4
20AWG BUS WIRE JUMPERS
(3 PLC.S)
"HI"
Installation Introduction
Schematics
312
4
2 THRU
YEL
GRN
134
803
PS1
(24V PWR SUPPLY)
BLU
BLU
BLK
2
1
132
GRN
802
5
1
3
2
4
RED
307
K1-4
K1
313
CB4
HIGH
YEL
K2
MED
6
(J5-3)
(SS-11)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
K3
APPROACH LIGHTS
5
GRN
316
OUT+
313
316
APPROACH
LIGHT
POWER
XFMR COM
4
5+
317
Table of
Contents
TB1
E
3872
ADDED LOAD RESISTORS
D
3709
UPDATE TITLE BLOCK
BE
26JUL13
DTR
14AUG12
DATE:
ADB Airfield Solutions
977 Gahanna Parkway, Columbus, Ohio 43230
Telephone: 614-861-1304, Fax: 614-864-2069
C
02140
NOTE REVISIONS
BE
18MAR09
DRAWING TITLE:
B
02129
POST INSTALL UPDATES
BE
08DEC08
A
-----
PRODUCTION RELEASE
BE
03NOV08
INTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM,
400V, SEQ. FLASHER MASTER,
MALSR
REV
ECO
LEVEL NUMBER
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS:
REVISION DESCRIPTION
DRAWN
BY
DRAWN BY:
DRAWN DATE:
BE
03NOV08
Information contained on this drawing is to be used expressly in accord with
purpose for which it was submitted. Any disclosure of this information is strictly
prohibited except as ADB Airfield Solutions, llc. may otherwise agree in writing.
Copyright Ó 2012 ADB Airfield Solutions
.
REV
DATE
SCALE:
N/A
DRAWING NUMBER:
43A3513
SHEET NUMBER:
1 OF 1
REV.
E
135
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
Disclaimer
Figure 68:
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400V, ALSF/SSALR, 120 VAC CONTROL
(WIRING SIDE OF PANEL SHOWN)
Table of
Contents
NOTE :
1. RESETTABLE HOUR METER:
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS: 1-3 ON, & 4-8 OFF SEE DETAIL "C". WIRES 437 & 438 CONNECT
TO PINS 4 & 5, AT THE REAR OF THE METER.
400V, ALSF/SSALR, 120 VAC CONTROL
DETAIL "C" - DIP SWITCH SETTINGS:
509
"ALSF"
454
455
("ALSF/SSALR" SWITCH)
509
510
CAREFULLY PRY COVER
OFF FROM THIS END.
(48VDC CONTROL-SEE SHEET 1)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
511
512
803
OFF
800
511
BLU
512
4
HOUR METER
"LOW"
510
2
3
xxxxx
COM
514
Parts
SSALR
448
435
409
455
431
412
414
415
416
413
450
601
804
8
510
431
4
407
448
407
1 11
BLU
10
428
426
427
422
423
424
508
400
447
13
439
431
448
448
412
25
508
28
454
431
14
404
412
9
15
407
431
412
408
407
417
2
439
421
420
3
416
802
405
406
402
406
448
449
447
5
6
7
8
403
409
435
455
507
506
507
804
7
ALSF/
25
17
412
406
1
2
27
405
448
417
406
6
6
415
405
Parts
11
414
415
414
417
SCHEMATIC:
8
9
5
7
4
3
443A
440A
417
5
X
DETAIL "B" - TB3 CONNECTIONS:
120 VAC RELAY
804
431
27
801
416
413
HIGH
PE
(1590.03.480)
412
447
431
Operation
12
P2
PCB4
514
417
430
12
X
28
437
J1
805
413
412
431
513
P1
417
429
449
PCB3
P2
431
431
6
11
TO PCB2-P2
BRN
800
22
804
431
412
11
435
601
802
12
RIBBON CABLE
ASSY'S (3)
TO PCB3-P3
P9
(1593.13.510)
514
SEE DETAIL "B"
430
5 HIGH
434
412
425
431
10 MED
ALSF
431
11
24
TB3
18
412
BRN
P5
426
427
428
433
438
M
513
414
415
416
413
401
412
4 MED
23
431
NOTE 1
LOW
P3
19 20 21
433
412
10
HOUR METER
9
11
17
412
WHT
INPUT
439
22 TO (TB3-120VAC)
BRN
420
421
422
423
424
446
408
437
3 LOW
PCB2
805
26
4
S5
TO PCB4-P2
(1593.13.412)
TB1
417
9
DC SUPPLY
512
P2
10 Ω, 25W RESISTOR
ADB# 15A0205
(HS SOLDER JOINTS)
TOP
PANEL
455
505
435
109
130
X
440
441
442
443
444
445
431
110
F4 10A
GRN
GFI
SELECTOR SWITCH SCHEMATIC:
X
26
412
SPARE
7
446
216
217
436
111
F5
F3
8
FLASHER
POWER
VR4
3
19
BRN
P1
TO PCB2-P5
129
1 REMOTE 7A
COM
L
118
SPARE
2 OFF
N
75 Ω, 25W RESISTOR
ADB# 15A0206
(HS SOLDER JOINTS)
440
441
442
443
444
445
1
2
3
4
5
6
214
A2
BLK
INPUT
1A
COM
412
446
112
F2 15A
126
MAINTENANCE
LAMP
120VAC (L1B SWITCHED)
VR3
128
127
12
PS2
407
124
NEUTRAL
209
215
INTERLOCK SWITCH (ON-OFF-ON)
131
LINE
212
213
201
11
209
6
5
436 A1
CB2
15A
126
120VAC (L1A SWITCHED)
408
125
10
444A
305
S2
F1 5A
2
20
803
208
214
218
BLU
123
211
207
207
SPARE
208
2
407
VR2
1
507
Introduction Installation
Schematics
210
206
206
441A
305
211
GND
NEUTRAL
BUSS
LOAD
304
303
VR1
302
LOAD
304
506
303
3
EARTH
GROUND
LINE
405
2
301
210
302
SPARE
9
406
NEUTRAL
120VAC (L1B)
301
2
405
1
K4
21
511
507
508
COM
601
412
120VAC (L1A)
120 /
240VAC
INPUT
8
CB3
30A
LINE
131
Safety
TB1
24
CONTROL PANEL
CB1
100A POWER
DISCONNECT
11
3 SEL 10
4 SW 9
8
5
6 7
455
23
505
510
506
1 12
2
513
"MED"
801
802
S3
20AWG BUS WIRE JUMPERS
(3 PLC.S)
"HI"
437
10
120 VAC RELAY SCHEMATIC:
136
K10
412
804
426
427
424
425
422
423
420
421
428
429
412
412
K11
434
404
403
402
401
TB2
F
4108
PG 2, MOVED WIRE 417
AV
20MAR14
E
3872
ADDED LOAD RESISTORS
BE
26JUL13
D
3242
ADDED NOTE 1
AV
10AUG11
C
-------
ADDED PAGE 2, ALSF 120VAC
AV
27JUL10
B
2640
SEE ECO
AV
25MAY10
A
-----
PRODUCTION RELEASE
AV
08MAR10
DRAWN
BY
REV
DATE
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS:
GND
NEUTRAL
CAUTION
FAULT
FLASHER ON
REV
ECO
LEVEL NUMBER
LOCAL
HI
MED
ALSF
LOW
COMMON
SPARE
NEUTRAL
FLASHER ON/OFF
CHG'D LO,MED,HI ON 48VDC
HI
NOTE: RELAYS SHOWN DE-ENERGIZED
APPROVED BY:
MED
7
12
LOW
1
2
18
ALSF
100 WIRE NO.S USE 16 AWG.
200's: USE 10 AWG.
300's: USE 6 AWG.
400's & 500'S : USE 18 AWG.
600: 22AWG, BLK, 200° C (ADB # 89A0002/10 or equal);
800's: 16AWG, GRN/YEL, UL1015, 600V, 105° C (ADB # 89A0163/6 or equal);
COLORED WIRES: 18AWG, UL1007, 300V, 80° C (ADB # 89A0207/X: "/1" = BRN,
"/2" = RED, "/3" = ORG, "/4" = YEL, "/5" = GRN, "/6 = BLU, "/7" = PUR, "/8" = GRY,
"/9" = WHT, "/10" = BLK or equal).
Unauthorized duplication of this document in whole or part is
prohibited. Initialed in RED ink below indicatesauthorized copy.
412
400
8
WIRE SIZES:
CONTROLLED COPY
5
6
4
3
120 VAC
Schematics
NOTE: RELAYS SHOWN DE-ENERGIZED
REVISION DESCRIPTION
DATE:
ADB Airfield Solutions
977 Gahanna Parkway, Columbus, Ohio 43230
Telephone: 614-861-1304, Fax: 614-864-2069
DRAWING TITLE:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWN DATE:
BE
03NOV08
Information contained on this drawing is to be used expressly in accord with purpose
for which it was submitted. Any disclosure of this information is strictly prohibited
except as ADB Airfield Solutions, Inc. may otherwise agree in writing. Copyright
2014 ADB Airfield Solutions
.
INTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM,
400V, ALSF/SSALR,
48VDC / 120 VAC CONTROL
SCALE:
SHEET NUMBER:
N/A
DRAWING NUMBER:
Ó
2 OF 2
REV.
43A3737
F
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
400V, ALSF/SSALR, 48 VDC CONTROL
Disclaimer
Figure 69:
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
(WIRING SIDE OF PANEL SHOWN)
454
455
("ALSF/SSALR" SWITCH)
510
511
802
5
1
3
2
4
PS1
(48V PWR SUPPLY)
803
OFF
K5-6
K8-6
412
K7-6
xxxxx
K6-6
HOUR METER
3
2
1
509
510
512
"LOW"
800
511
BLU
512
4
COM
112
N.O.
128
N.O.
455
431
426
427
428
420
421
422
423
424
805
409
430
435
431
450
443A
414
415
416
413
Operation
450
448
448
412
25
Parts
428
427
426
422
420
10
439
508
28
454
450
14
404
412
9
5
6
7
8
416
415
414
413
450
416
415
414
413
450
CONTROLLED COPY
5
6
4
3
K10
K11
12
804
427
412
426
424
425
422
423
420
421
434
404
403
402
401
APPROVED BY:
TB2
F
4108
PG 2, MOVED WIRE 417
AV
20MAR14
E
3872
ADDED LOAD RESISTORS
BE
26JUL13
D
3242
ADDED NOTE 1
AV
10AUG11
C
-------
ADDED PAGE 2, ALSF 120VAC
AV
27JUL10
B
2640
SEE ECO
AV
25MAY10
A
-----
PRODUCTION RELEASE
AV
08MAR10
DRAWN
BY
REV
DATE
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS:
GND
NEUTRAL
FAULT
CAUTION
FLASHER ON
REV
ECO
LEVEL NUMBER
LOCAL
HI
MED
ALSF
LOW
FLASHER ON/OFF
HI
MED
CHG'D LO,MED,HI ON 48VDC
LOW
NOTE: RELAYS SHOWN DE-ENERGIZED
18
ALSF
7
Unauthorized duplication of this document in whole or part is
prohibited. Initialed in RED ink below indicatesauthorized copy.
412
400
1
2
1 11
13
SCHEMATIC:
48VDC
8
WIRE SIZES:
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
4
416
415
414
413
48VDC RELAY
449
439
508
400
447
15
407
10
100 WIRE NO.S USE 16 AWG.
200's: USE 10 AWG.
300's: USE 6 AWG.
400's & 500'S : USE 18 AWG.
600: 22AWG, BLK, 200° C (ADB # 89A0002/10 or equal);
800's: 16AWG, GRN/YEL, UL1015, 600V, 105° C (ADB # 89A0163/6 or equal);
COLORED WIRES: 18AWG, UL1007, 300V, 80° C (ADB # 89A0207/X: "/1" = BRN,
"/2" = RED, "/3" = ORG, "/4" = YEL, "/5" = GRN, "/6 = BLU, "/7" = PUR, "/8" = GRY,
"/9" = WHT, "/10" = BLK or equal).
412
431
8
510
437
BLU
3
415
2
406
450
431
412
408
2
804
431
406
448
NOTE: RELAYS SHOWN DE-ENERGIZED
455
402
511
3
17
412
7
VDC
802
804
450
448
447
Parts
448
414
407
430
409
435
455
804
507
506
507
4
27
405
416
415
414
1
2
SSALR
407
6
6
512
48
ALSF/
801
413
448
25
406
11
SCHEMATIC:
8
9
5
7
4
3
505
5
405
120 VAC RELAY
PE
(1590.03.480)
509
1
DETAIL "B" - TB3 CONNECTIONS:
P1
412
HIGH
X
P2
PCB4
416
413
27
J1
514
412
412
12
X
447
437
513
805
414
415
431
6
431
22
412
11
28
12
431
5 HIGH
429
449
P2
431
412
10 MED
11
PCB3
450
4 MED
435
LOW
TO PCB2-P2
BRN
800
804
431
450
412
428
9
601
RIBBON CABLE
ASSY'S (3)
TO PCB3-P3
P9
(1593.13.520)
514
SEE DETAIL "B"
802
12
COMMON
3 LOW
434
412
425
SPARE
X
X
429
7
8
407
11
407
1 REMOTE 7A
COM
VDC
450
HOUR METER
2 OFF
TB3
48
ALSF
412
24
423
424
433
438
M
18
513
414
415
416
413
401
23
BRN
P5
15
421
NOTE 1
437
1A
COM
16
450
10
408
WHT
INPUT
P3
407
SPARE
F3
130
PCB2
BRN
19 20 21
138
412
408
11
17
BLU
129
439
446
405
109
26
22 TO (TB3-48VDC)
403
9
DC SUPPLY
TO (TB3-LOW)
S5
TO PCB4-P2
(1593.13.412)
TB1
TOP
PANEL
455
507
435
412
431
110
F4 10A
GRN
SELECTOR SWITCH SCHEMATIC:
440
441
442
443
444
445
P2
10 Ω, 25W RESISTOR
ADB# 15A0205
(HS SOLDER JOINTS)
412
436
SPARE
GFI
26
118
111
F5
126
MAINTENANCE
LAMP
446
216
217
19
BRN
P1
TO PCB2-P5
BLK
INPUT
127
L
FLASHER
POWER
VR4
COM
A2
F2 15A
N
446
75 Ω, 25W RESISTOR
ADB# 15A0206
(HS SOLDER JOINTS)
440
441
442
443
444
445
1
2
3
4
5
6
214
VR3
507
Schematics
COM
412
506
124
120VAC (L1B SWITCHED)
INTERLOCK SWITCH (ON-OFF-ON)
131
LINE
212
213
201
12
6
5
436 A1
CB2
15A
126
NEUTRAL
209
215
405
125
11
209
2
PS2
440A
305
S2
F1 5A
120VAC (L1A SWITCHED)
406
123
211
10
TO (TB3-HI)
20 TO (TB3-MED)
803
208
214
218
405
VR2
1
207
207
SPARE
208
444A
305
210
206
206
SPARE
9
441A
303
211
GND
NEUTRAL
BUSS
LOAD
304
8
406
303
VR1
302
LOAD
304
210
302
3
EARTH
GROUND
LINE
2
412
412
2
301
K4
21
506
11
3 SEL 10
4 SW 9
8
5
6 7
508
COM
601
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
120VAC (L1B)
301
24
412
1
CB3
30A
LINE
131
120VAC (L1A)
120 /
240VAC
INPUT
514
CONTROL PANEL
CB1
100A POWER
DISCONNECT
TB1
23
505
1 12
2
513
"MED"
801
431
S3
20AWG BUS WIRE JUMPERS
(3 PLC.S)
"HI"
Table of
Contents
(120VAC CONTROL-SEE SHEET 2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
16
"ALSF"
Safety
15
OUT-
CAREFULLY PRY COVER
OFF FROM THIS END.
409
430
509
Installation Introduction
Schematics
400V, ALSF/SSALR, 48 VDC CONTROL
DETAIL "C" - DIP SWITCH SETTINGS:
OUT+
NOTE :
1. RESETTABLE HOUR METER:
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS: 1-3 ON, & 4-8 OFF SEE DETAIL "C". WIRES 437 & 438 CONNECT
TO PINS 4 & 5, AT THE REAR OF THE METER.
REVISION DESCRIPTION
DATE:
ADB Airfield Solutions
977 Gahanna Parkway, Columbus, Ohio 43230
Telephone: 614-861-1304, Fax: 614-864-2069
DRAWING TITLE:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWN DATE:
BE
03NOV08
Information contained on this drawing is to be used expressly in accord with purpose
for which it was submitted. Any disclosure of this information is strictly prohibited
except as ADB Airfield Solutions, Inc. may otherwise agree in writing. Copyright
2014 ADB Airfield Solutions
.
INTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM,
400V, ALSF/SSALR,
48VDC / 120 VAC CONTROL
SCALE:
N/A
DRAWING NUMBER:
Ó
43A3737
SHEET NUMBER:
1 OF 2
REV.
F
137
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
Disclaimer
Figure 70:
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Elevated Flash Head Assembly
UEL-1-120-C
ELEVATED FLASH HEAD
Table of
Contents
WIRE COLOR
BLACK (CAB+)
WIRE COLOR
BLACK (CAB -)
WIRE OUTER SHIELD TO BE GROUNDED
AT COMPRESSION FITTING
Safety
WIRE COLOR
YELLOW/GRN
(PE)
Introduction Installation
Schematics
WIRE COLOR
BROWN
(400V)
SHIELDED 5 COND.
CABLE # 89A0290-5
ORDER LENGTH TO BE DETERMINED
AT TIME OF ORDER.
SUPPLIED WITH ADB ICC
WIRE COLOR
BLACK
BRAIDED
GROUND
Operation
WIRE COLOR
BLACK
WIRE COLOR
BLUE (TRIG)
Parts
WIRE COLOR
YELLOW/GRN
WIRE COLOR
BROWN
Parts
WIRE COLOR
BLUE
Schematics
138
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Mounting the Master Control Cabinet
3.0
76
Disclaimer
Figure 71:
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
13.38
339.8
B
.438-inch (11.1mm) diam
Table of
Contents
C
Master Control
Cabinet
Safety
D
Installation Introduction
Schematics
A
6.0 Min.
152.4
6.0
152.4
24.0 Min.
609.6
3.0
76
36.0
914.4
Schematics
Parts
Parts
Dimensions: inch/mm
Operation
9.0 Min.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
139
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
Disclaimer
Figure 72:
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
ICC, Junction Boxes and Isolation Transformers
48.0 Min.
1219.1
Table of
Contents
Safety
4.25
108
9.5
241.3
Introduction Installation
Schematics
20.00
508
3.0
76.0
6.0
152.4
2.50
63,5
.75
(19)
.50 (12.7)
DIA.
.50
36.0 Min.
914.4
8.00
203
6.56
167
Operation
Dimensions: inch/mm
Parts
18.00
457
Parts
11.75
298
Dimensions: inch/mm
13.12
333
NAMEPLATE (REF.)
X1
X2
X3
H1
H2
H3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Schematics
140
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
ITEM NO.
PART NUMBER
1
44A676312121202
/QTY.
DESCRIPTION
CONTROL PANEL MALSR
44A6850-12121202
44A676312121203
/QTY.
1
-
44A676320521123
/QTY.
Disclaimer
Master Control Panel Assembly
44A676352121202
/QTY.
-
1
1
44A6850-12121203
CONTROL PANEL MALSR
-
1
-
-
1
44A6850-20521123
CONTROL PANEL MALSR
-
-
1
1
44A6851-1
MASTER CONTROL CABINET MALSR/ALSF ASSEMBLY
-
-
-
2
44A6851
MASTER CONTROL CABINET MALSR/ALSF ASSEMBLY
1
1
1
-
3
66A0015/29
3/8 FLATWASHER
4
4
4
4
3
65A0015/29
3/8-16 HX NUT
4
4
4
4
4
66A0026/24
1/4 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
4
4
4
4
Safety
2
Table of
Contents
Figure 73:
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
Installation Introduction
Schematics
3
44A6763/X X X X X X X X
1
REMOTE CONNECTION - HARDWARE
0 = NONE
1 = +24V DC
2 = +48V DC
3 = 120V AC
2
REMOTE CONNECTION - FIELDBUS
0 = NONE
1 = SINGLE J- BUS
2 = DUAL J-BUS
Operation
SURGE PROTECTION
1 = 6.6kA SURGE PROTECTION
(STANDARD)
2 = 80kA SURGE PROTECTION
INPUT VOLTAGE
1 = 120/240V AC (STANDARD)
MONITORING
1 = WITHOUT MONITORING
2 = WITH MONITORING
Parts
FLASHERS
XX = MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FLASHERS
EXAMPLES:
08 = 8 FLASHERS
21 = 21 FLASHERS
Parts
SYSTEM
1 = ALSF PER FAA E-2628
2 = MALSR PER FAA E-2325
3 = VC LEAP 2980
4 = UDAL
5 = ALSF PER FAA E-2628 SST ENCL
PART NUMBER
CONTROLLED COPY
Unauthorized duplication of this document in whole or part is prohibited.
Initialed in RED ink below indicates authorized copy.
TBD
TBD
TBD
Schematics
DESCRIPTION
WIRING DIAGRAM
WORK PROCEDURE
TEST PROCEDURE
INITIAL & DATE:
SIEMENS AIRFIELD SOLUTIONS, INC.
977 Gahanna Parkway, Columbus, Ohio 43230
Telephone: 614-861-1304, Fax: 614-864-2069
C
2723
B
2498
A
REV
LEVEL
--ECO
NUMBER
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS:
SEE ECO
SEE ECO - ADD CONFIGS
INITIAL RELEASE
REVISION DESCRIPTION
DTR
23JUL10
02FEB10
DLM
18FEB08
DRAWN
BY
REV
DATE
DRAWN BY:
DRAWN DATE:
D. Mowery
18FEB08
Information contained on this drawing is to be used expressly in accord
with purpose for which it was submitted. Any disclosure of this
information is strictly prohibited except as Siemens Airfield Solutions,
Inc. may otherwise agree in writing.
Copyright 2007 Siemens Airfield Solutions
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
JLC
DRAWING TITLE:
MASTER CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY
240/120 VAC
MALSR SYSTEM
SCALE:
SHEET NUMBER:
1:8
DRAWING NUMBER:
44A6763
1 OF 1
REV.
C
141
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
Disclaimer
Figure 74:
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Intrior Assembly of the MCC 1 of 3
Table of
Contents
Safety
Introduction Installation
Schematics
Operation
Parts
Parts
ITEM
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
32A0011
44A6839
44A6839-1
44A6839-2
44A6840
44A6840-1
44A6841
44A6841-1
44A6841-2
44A6842
44A6842-1
44A6843
44A6844
44A6844-1
44A6845
44B1785
53A0412-60
53A0412/30
60B0929
60C0928
60D0927
63A0543
63A0544
66A0132
64A0173-10
64A0177-10
64A0177-16
64A0177-6
64A0177/12
64A0191/8
64A0196-6
64A0966-06
66A0015/15
66A0015/17
66A0015/24
66A0026/15
66A0026/17
66A0026/24
66A0050-24
70A0299
70A0303
70A0329
72A0005-1
72A0017
72A0026
72A0070
72A0071
72A0134
72A0136
72A0137
72A0320
89A0283
DESCRIPTION
VARISTOR
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 120V MALSR
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 48V ALSF
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 120V ALSF
CONTROL BOARD ASSEMBLY MALSR
CONTROL BOARD ASSEMBLY 48V ALSF
RELAY ASSEMBLY, 120V, MALSR
RELAY ASSEMBLY, 48V ALSF
RELAY ASSEMBLY, 120V, ALSF
CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY MALSR
CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY ALSF
MTG. BRACKET, LAMP ASSEMBLY MALSR/ASLF
BRACKET CIRCUIT BREAKER ASSEMBLY MALSR
BRACKET CIRCUIT BREAKER ASSEMBLY MALSR
INTERLOCK SWITCH BRACKET ASSEMBLY
HINGED SUPORT MSR CNTRL PCB
CONT 2P 60 FLA 120VAC COIL
CONT 2P 30 FLA 120VAC COIL
MTG PLATE MALSR/ALSF SUBPLATE
MTG PLATE MALSR MASTER
CONTROL PANEL ALSF MASTER CAB
BUSHING RING
BUSHING GROMMET
SPACER 1/4 OD X .20ID
1/4-20 X 5/8 HX HD
10-32 X 5/8 PAN HD PHIL
10-32 X 1 PAN HD PHIL
10-32 X 3/8 PAN HD PHIL
10-32 X 3/4 PAN HD PHIL
8-32 X 1/2 PAN HD PHIL
1/4-20 X 3/8 PAN HD PHIL
TAPTITE SCREW 8-32 X 3/8 LONG
#8 FLATWASHER
#10 FLATWASHER
1/4 FLATWASHER
#8 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
#10 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
1/4 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
STANDOFF HEX 3/8 X 1-1/2 10-32
TERM RING 12-10AWG 1/4 NOINSUL
DISCONECT FEM 22-18 .205X.02 IN
FEM DISC 16-14AWG .25X.03 INS
TERM BLK 22-10AWG 300V 50A
TERM BLK 18-6AWG 600V 90A
TERM BLK END
TERM BLK END
TERM BLK #12-1/0 AWG 600V 155A
GROUND LUG #2-14AWG
GROUND BAR
COLLAR STRAP
TERM BLK END
RIBBON CABLE 20 PIN 18" LG.
44A685020521123/
QTY.
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
1
8
2
2
14
8
6
24
10
30
6
24
28
7
16
11
2
2
7
4
1
1
8
1
1
1
1
1
44A685012121203/
QTY.
44A685012121202/
QTY.
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
4
4
4
1
8
2
2
6
8
6
18
10
22
6
22
20
7
16
11
2
2
4
1
1
8
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
4
4
4
1
8
2
2
6
8
6
18
10
22
6
22
20
7
16
11
2
2
4
1
1
8
1
1
1
1
30
35
NOTE
1
11
25
18
30
37
15
34
28
38
42
12
10
30
5
3
28
25
9
7
30
4
14
8
43
2
28
19
30
6
23
27
DETAIL A
SCALE 1 : 1
RIBBON CABLE
CONNECTS TO
LOCATION AS
SHOWN
DETAIL FOR STACKING OF HARDWARE TO
ASSURE PROPER CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOARDS
44A6850/X X X X X X X X
24
REMOTE CONNECTION - HARDWARE
0 = NONE
1 = +24V DC
2 = +48V DC
3 = 120V AC
8
6
7
2
REMOTE CONNECTION - FIELDBUS
0 = NONE
1 = SINGLE J- BUS
2 = DUAL J-BUS
3
SURGE PROTECTION
1 = 6.6kA SURGE PROTECTION
(STANDARD)
2 = 80kA SURGE PROTECTION
5
22
28
25
INPUT VOLTAGE
1 = 120/240V AC (STANDARD)
17
29
A
2
2
2
FLASHERS
XX = MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FLASHERS
EXAMPLES:
08 = 8 FLASHERS
21 = 21 FLASHERS
10
23
4
28
13
20
41
29
20
28
25
15
SYSTEM
1 = ALSF PER FAA E-2628
2 = MALSR PER FAA E-2325
3 = VC LEAP 2980
40
16
39
21
2
MONITORING
1 = WITHOUT MONITORING
2 = WITH MONITORING
26
34
21
37
38
23
42
27
23
CONTROLLED COPY
Unauthorized duplication of this document in whole or part is prohibited.
Initialed in RED ink below indicates authorized copy.
27
23
36
35
INITIAL & DATE:
Schematics
E
D
142
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
WIRING DIAGRAM
WORK PROCEDURE
TEST PROCEDURE
43A3461
TBD
TBD
NOTES:
1. 44A6850/20521123, /12121202 & /12121203 ARE THE
ONLY CONFIGURATIONS THAT EXISTS AT THIS TIME.
2. ITEMS NOT SHOWN.
3. 44A6850/20521123 SHOWN THIS SHEET.
3249
2716
SEE EC
SEE ECO - ADD 44A6840-1 CONFIG
JEG
17AUG11
C
2640
SEE ECO - ALSF UDATES
DTR
DTR
B
2498
SEE ECO/ ADDED NEW CONFIGS
DTR
26MAY10
06JAN10
DLM
21FEB08
DRAWN
BY
REV
DATE
A
REV
LEVEL
--ECO
NUMBER
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS:
INITIAL RELEASE
REVISION DESCRIPTION
13JUL10
DRAWN BY:
DRAWN DATE:
D. Mowery
21FEB08
Information contained on this drawing is to be used expressly in
accord with purpose for which it was submitted. Any disclosure
of this information is strictly prohibited except as ADB Airfield
Solutions, Inc. may otherwise agree in writing. Copyright 2009
ADB Airfield Solutions.
ADB Airfield Solutions
P.O. BOX 30829
Tel. (614) 861-1304
977 Gahanna Parkway Fax. (614) 864-2069
Columbus, Ohio 43230
DRAWING TITLE:
CONTROL PANEL MALSR/ALSF ASSEMBLY
SCALE:
SHEET NUMBER:
1:8
DRAWING NUMBER:
44A6850
1 OF 3
REV.
E
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Intrior Assembly of the MCC 2 of 3
Disclaimer
Figure 75:
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
44A6850/X X X X X X X X
REMOTE CONNECTION - HARDWARE
0 = NONE
1 = +24V DC
2 = +48V DC
3 = 120V AC
8
7
6
8
7
5
27
REMOTE CONNECTION - FIELDBUS
0 = NONE
1 = SINGLE J- BUS
2 = DUAL J-BUS
23
24
5
Table of
Contents
6
SURGE PROTECTION
1 = 6.6kA SURGE PROTECTION
(STANDARD)
2 = 80kA SURGE PROTECTION
25
30
22
26
INPUT VOLTAGE
1 = 120/240V AC (STANDARD)
29
MONITORING
1 = WITHOUT MONITORING
2 = WITH MONITORING
10
2
FLASHERS
XX = MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FLASHERS
EXAMPLES:
08 = 8 FLASHERS
21 = 21 FLASHERS
13
20
25
Safety
17
15
SYSTEM
1 = ALSF PER FAA E-2628
2 = MALSR PER FAA E-2325
3 = VC LEAP 2980
3
3
11
?
41
Installation Introduction
Schematics
28
41
1
1
23
27
4
4
Operation
14
14
40
20
16
29
39
28
Parts
39
40
44A6850-12121203
Parts
44A6850-20521123
CONTROLLED COPY
Unauthorized duplication of this document in whole or part is prohibited.
Initialed in RED ink below indicates authorized copy.
NOTES:
1. FOR BILL OF MATERIAL SEE SHEET 1.
E
3249
SEE EC
17AUG11
D
2716
C
2640
SEE ECO - ALSF UDATES
DTR
DTR
B
2498
SEE ECO/ ADDED NEW CONFIGS
DTR
26MAY10
06JAN10
DLM
21FEB08
DRAWN
BY
REV
DATE
A
REV
LEVEL
--ECO
NUMBER
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS:
SEE ECO - ADD 44A6840-1 CONFIG
INITIAL RELEASE
REVISION DESCRIPTION
13JUL10
DRAWN BY:
DRAWN DATE:
D. Mowery
21FEB08
Information contained on this drawing is to be used expressly in
accord with purpose for which it was submitted. Any disclosure
of this information is strictly prohibited except as ADB Airfield
Solutions, Inc. may otherwise agree in writing. Copyright 2009
ADB Airfield Solutions.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
JEG
Schematics
INITIAL & DATE:
ADB Airfield Solutions
P.O. BOX 30829
Tel. (614) 861-1304
977 Gahanna Parkway Fax. (614) 864-2069
Columbus, Ohio 43230
DRAWING TITLE:
CONTROL PANEL MALSR/ALSF ASSEMBLY
SCALE:
SHEET NUMBER:
1:4
DRAWING NUMBER:
44A6850
2 OF 3
REV.
E
143
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
Disclaimer
Figure 76:
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Intrior Assembly of the MCC 3 of 3
Table of
Contents
STANDOFFS HAVE NO
HARDWARE THIS
LOCATION ONLY
30
Safety
Introduction Installation
Schematics
Operation
21
24
27
ATTACH PCB TO
HINGE
Parts
NOTES:
1. FOR BILL OF MATERIAL SEE SHEET 1.
Parts
CONTROLLED COPY
Unauthorized duplication of this document in whole or part is prohibited.
Initialed in RED ink below indicates authorized copy.
Schematics
INITIAL & DATE:
30
9
21
24
27
17
TYP
25
28
E
D
3249
2716
SEE EC
SEE ECO - ADD 44A6840-1 CONFIG
17AUG11
C
2640
SEE ECO - ALSF UDATES
DTR
DTR
B
2498
SEE ECO/ ADDED NEW CONFIGS
DTR
26MAY10
06JAN10
INITIAL RELEASE
DLM
21FEB08
REVISION DESCRIPTION
DRAWN
BY
REV
DATE
A
REV
LEVEL
--ECO
NUMBER
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS:
13JUL10
DRAWN BY:
DRAWN DATE:
D. Mowery
21FEB08
Information contained on this drawing is to be used expressly in
accord with purpose for which it was submitted. Any disclosure
of this information is strictly prohibited except as ADB Airfield
Solutions, Inc. may otherwise agree in writing. Copyright 2009
ADB Airfield Solutions.
144
JEG
ADB Airfield Solutions
P.O. BOX 30829
Tel. (614) 861-1304
977 Gahanna Parkway Fax. (614) 864-2069
Columbus, Ohio 43230
DRAWING TITLE:
CONTROL PANEL MALSR/ALSF ASSEMBLY
SCALE:
SHEET NUMBER:
1:8
DRAWING NUMBER:
44A6850
3 OF 3
REV.
E
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
ITEM
NO.
1
60A4014
2
45A0303
3
64A0191-6
4
65A0015-15
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
42A0587
MALSR Switch / Light Panel Label
1
7
42A0609
ALSF Switch / Light Panel Label
1
2
45A0468
Switch Toggle SPDT SLDR LUG 5PCS
1
3
46A0092-6
Rotary SW 30DEG SP 6POS.
1
3
61A0454
Knob, Phenolic, 1/4" Shaft, Pointer
1
4
48A0406
Neon Lamp, Neon IND 110V AMB
4
5
60A4010
Switch / Light Panel BRKT MALSR
1
6
63A0255
Cable Tie Mount Metal
1
6-32 X 3/8 Pan Head Phillips
1
6
64A0198-6
QTY.
6
66A0026-11
#6 Split Lockwasher
1
DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH BRACKET ADB CONDENSER
DISCHARGE ENCL
INTRLCK SWITCH DPDT 10A ON-ON
1
6
65a0015-11
#6-32 HX NUT
1
#8-32 X 3/8 PAN HD PHIL
1
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
8-32 HX NUT
Table of
Contents
PART NUMBER
Safety
ITEM
Disclaimer
Interlock Switch and Control Panel Assembly
1
Installation Introduction
Schematics
Figure 77:
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
1
4
1 or 7
2
2
4
Operation
4
4
5
3
Parts
Parts
1
Schematics
4
3
NOTES:
1. RETAIN L-SHAPED COMPRESSION BRACKET FROM ORIGINAL ASSEMBLY
FOR REUSE WITH THIS ASSEMBLY.
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
6
145
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
Disclaimer
Figure 78:
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
Master Control Panel
ITEM
NO.
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
1
17
Table of
Contents
7
9
BROWN WIRE LOCATION
4
11
RIBBON CABLE CONNECTS
TO LOCATION AS SHOWN
Safety
5
18
LOWER EXISTING
STANDOFFS ARE
TO REMAIN FOR
NEW INSTALLATION
BROWN WIRE LOCATION
Introduction Installation
Schematics
PART NUMBER
44A6841
94A0513
44A6842
44A6849
64A0177-10
64A0191-10
64A0196-6
66A0015-17
66A0015/24
66A0026/17
66A0026/24
89A0283
66A0092
66A0213-8
66A0124
44A6840
44A6839
44A6844
DESCRIPTION
RELAY ASSEMBLY, 120V, MALSR
MALSR WIRE HARNESS PARTS KIT FOR VENDOR
CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY MALSR
WIRING HARNESS MALSR
10-32 X 5/8 PAN HD PHIL
M-F STNDFF, CHRM / BRASS, 10-32 X 1-1.5 LONG, 3/8 BODY12
1/4-20 X 3/8 PAN HD PHIL
#10 FLATWASHER
1/4 FLATWASHER
#10 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
1/4 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
RIBBON CABLE 20 PIN 18" LG.
STANDOFF ALUM HEX 1/4 M-F 8/32 1" LONG
STANDOFF ALUM HEX 1/4 M-F 8/32 1/2" LONG
STANDOFF HINGE
CONTROL BOARD ASSEMBLY MALSR
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 120V MALSR
BRACKET CIRCUIT BREAKER ASSEMBLY MALSR
QTY.
1
1
1
1
10
NOTES
3
6
24
6
30
7
1
4
3
1
1
1
1
C
Operation
2
6
10
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
WIRING DIAGRAM
WORK PROCEDURE
TEST PROCEDURE
43A3461
TBD
103A0351
8
Parts
Parts
NOTE:
1. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ALL COMPONENTS REMAIN, REFERENCE ALN#
2. SEE SHEET 2 FOR SUB ASSEMBLIES AND BOM.
3. ASSEMBLY PART OF 94A0513 HARNESS PARTS KIT. KIT DOES NOT INCLUDE
RELAYS.
Schematics
DETAIL C
SCALE 1 : 2
DRAWING NUMBER:
94A0507
146
REV.
A
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
15
9
3
1
2
6
9
14
15
PART
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
44A6841
QTY.
44A6841-1 44A6841-2
QTY.
QTY.
1
49A0361
SOCKET RELAY 8 PINS
8
10
10
2
49A0363
SOCKET RELAY 11 PINS
1
1
1
3
53A0436
120VAC 50/60HZ 12 AMP SPDT
1
-
-
4
53A0437
24VDC 10 AMP DPDT
4
-
-
5
53A0442
RELAY, 11 PIN, 3DPDT, 12A
1
1
1
6
53A0443
3
-
-
7
53A0447
RELAY DPDT, 48VDC COIL, 8 PINS
-
10
-
8
53A0450
120VAC 50/60HZ 12AMP DPDT
-
-
10
9
60A4007
RELAY TIME DELAY
RELAY MOUNTING PLATE MALSR
1
1
1
10
64A0169-16
4-40 X 1" PAN HD PHIL
18
22
22
11
64A0169-6
#4-40 X 3/8 PAN HD PHIL
12
66A0015-7
13
66A0026-7
14
72A0066
15
72A0067
6
6
6
#4 FLATWASHER SS
6
6
6
#4 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
24
28
28
33
33
33
3
3
3
TERM BLK 22-10AWG 600V 50A,USE W/72A0067
TERM BLK END, FLAT BASE, MATES W/72A0066
Table of
Contents
14
ITEM
NO.
4
Disclaimer
Relay Panel Assembly
Safety
Figure 79:
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
Installation Introduction
Schematics
5
7
1
11
12 13
K13
14
K14
2
7
15
44A6841
120V ASSEMBLY
MALSR
14
15
9
K15
Operation
15
8
1
5
11
12 13
Parts
K13
14
K14
8
15
Parts
44A6841-1
48V ASSEMBLY
ALSF
K15
CONTROLLED COPY
2
Unauthorized duplication of this document in whole or part is prohibited.
Initialed in RED ink below indicates authorized copy.
5
INITIAL & DATE:
12 13
E
D
15
14
44A6841-2
120V ASSEMBLY
ALSF
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
2727
SEE ECO - CHNG /2 RELAYS
DTR
2716
28JUL10
ADB Airfield Solutions
P.O. BOX 30829
Tel. (614) 861-1304
977 Gahanna Parkway Fax. (614) 864-2069
Columbus, Ohio 43230
SEE ECO - CHNG -2 CONFIG
DTR
12JUL10
C
2640
SEE ECO
DTR
B
2498
SEE ECO
DTR
20MAY10 DRAWING TITLE:
RELAY ASSEMBLY MALSR/ ALSF
11JAN10
A
---
INITIAL RELEASE
DLM
18FEB08
ECO
REV
LEVEL NUMBER
REVISION DESCRIPTION
DRAWN
BY
REV
DATE
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS:
DRAWN BY:
Schematics
11
DRAWN DATE:
18FEB10
Information contained on this drawing is to be used expressly in
accord with purpose for which it was submitted. Any disclosure
of this information is strictly prohibited except as ADB Airfield
Solutions, Inc. may otherwise agree in writing. Copyright 2009
ADB Airfield Solutions.
SCALE:
SHEET NUMBER:
1:1.5
DRAWING NUMBER:
44A6841
1 OF 1
REV.
E
147
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
Disclaimer
Figure 80:
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
PCB Assembly
Table of
Contents
BROWN WIRE
LOCATION
BROWN WIRE
LOCATION
3
9
Safety
4
Introduction Installation
Schematics
ITEM
NO.
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
11
PART NUMBER
1590.03.480
1593.13.412F
1593.13.510
1593.13.520
60A4011
64A0199/4
66A0026/11
66A0026/24
64A0173/6
66A0129
89A0281
89A0282
RM0251 X 2.25
DESCRIPTION
PCB1498
PCB1485 (FAA)
SFL 24VDC MULTIPWIRE PCB, PCB 1486
SFL 48VDC MULTIPWIRE PCB
CONTROL BOARD MOUNTING PLATE MALSR
6-32 X 1/4 PAN HD PHIL
#6 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
1/4 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
1/4-20 X 3/8 HX HD
STANDOFF HEX M-F 3/4 X 6-32
RIBBON CABLE 26 PIN 18" LG.
RIBBON CABLE 26 PIN 18" LG.
MTG RAIL 7.5MM U-SHAPE - 2.25 LG
44A6840
/QTY.
1
1
1
1
14
14
2
2
14
1
1
1
44A6840-1
/QTY.
1
1
1
1
14
14
2
2
14
1
1
1
1
2
11
Operation
7
Parts
10
BROWN WIRE
LOCATION
Parts
5
6
Schematics
8
NOTES:
1. ITEM 5 ROUTES UNDER ITEM 2, AND CONNECTS
BETWEEN LOCATIONS SHOWN ON ITEMS 2 & 4, REF.
LOCATION OF BROWN WIRE.
2. ITEM 6 ROUTES UNDER ITEM 2 AND CONNECTS
BETWEEN LOCATIONS SHOWN ON ITEMS 2 & 3, REF.
LOCATION OF BROWN WIRE.
4
148
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
7
5
16
3
1
14
11
17
44A6839
QTY.
DESCRIPTION
44A6839-1
QTY.
44A6839-2
QTY.
1
1590.03.490
MASTER J-BUS BOARD, PCB 1502
1
-
-
2
60A4008
MOUNTING PLATE POWER SUPPLY MALSR
1
1
1
3
60A4009
XFMR MOUNTING PLATE MALSR
1
-
-
4
64A0199-4
6-32 X 1/4 PAN HD PHIL
8
4
4
5
64A0177-8
10-32 X 1/2 PAN HD PHIL
2
-
-
6
64A0245/8
8-32 X 1/2 HX HD SELF TAP
-
4
-
7
65A0015-19
10-32 HX NUT
2
-
-
8
66A0026/11
#6 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
8
4
4
-
9
66A0026/15
#8 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
-
4
10
66A0026/17
#10 SPLIT LOCKWASHER
2
-
-
11
66A0039-6
#10 EXTERNAL LOCKWASHER
2
-
-
12
13
66A0129
70A0775
STANDOFF HEX M-F 3/4 X 6-32
Wire to PCB Multipole Connector, 6 Contacts, 3.96mm
8
1
4
1
4
1
14
70A0776
Wire to PCB Crimp Housing Connector, 3 Contacts, 3.96mm
15
72A0399
16
97A0001
16
97A0010
17
97A0028
LPT45 SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY
1
1
1
8
8
8
POWER SUPPLY 48VDC 1A
-
1
-
POWER SUPPLY 24VDC 1.2
1
-
-
1
1
1
Crimp Pin, 18-24AWG
Table of
Contents
10
PART
NUMBER
Safety
ITEM
NO.
Disclaimer
Power Supply Assembly MALSR/ALSF 44A6839
Installation Introduction
Schematics
Figure 81:
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
2
8
4
14
12
44A6839
120V MALSR
Operation
13
16
Parts
17
2
8
17
4
12
13
14
6
2
44A6839-2
120V ALSF
Parts
9
CONTROLLED COPY
Unauthorized duplication of this document in whole or part is prohibited.
Initialed in RED ink below indicates authorized copy.
D
8
4
12
13
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
44A6839-1
48V ALSF
2727
SEE ECO - CHNG 4-40 HDWR TO 6-32 DTR
C
2716
SEE ECO - RWK /2
DTR
B
2640
SEE ECO - ADD -1 ALSF
DTR
A
---
28JUL10
Schematics
INITIAL & DATE:
ADB Airfield Solutions
P.O. BOX 30829
Tel. (614) 861-1304
977 Gahanna Parkway Fax. (614) 864-2069
Columbus, Ohio 43230
12JUL10 DRAWING TITLE:
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY MALSR/ALSF
27MAY10
INITIAL RELEASE
DLM
18FEB08
ECO
REV
LEVEL NUMBER
REVISION DESCRIPTION
DRAWN
BY
REV
DATE
ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWN DATE:
18FEB08
Information contained on this drawing is to be used expressly in
accord with purpose for which it was submitted. Any disclosure
of this information is strictly prohibited except as ADB Airfield
Solutions, Inc. may otherwise agree in writing. Copyright 2009
ADB Airfield Solutions.
SCALE:
SHEET NUMBER:
1:1
DRAWING NUMBER:
44A6839
1 OF 1
REV.
D
149
400 V: MALSR and ALSF
Schematics
Disclaimer
Figure 82:
96A0400 Rev. J
4/7/14
ICC-1
Table of
Contents
Main items
A FCU PCB 1487, 1590.03.464
D
Safety
A
B Door microswitch 6150.49.010
C DC power supply module 6341.80.230
D Capacitor, 1200 µf, +30 -10%, 415 V, 6323.61.120
B
E
E Choke, 1.5 mH, 150 A, 6166.50.150
Introduction Installation
Schematics
F Mains filter, 6115.18.020
G Heater resistance, 1500 Ω, 100 W, 6310.51.620
G
L
H Mains socket outlet, (option), 240 Vac only
I Fused input switch (F1)
J Over-voltage protection modules (MOV) (option), 6134.03.050
K Power input terminals,
H
•
•
Phase terminal , 6112.45.170
Earth Ground, 6112.45.007
L Local bus connection board, PCB 1498, 1590.03.480
Operation
C
F
I
J
K
Parts
Parts
Schematics
150
© 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Registered office:
ADB Airfield Solutions LLC
977 Gahanna Parkway
Columbus, OH 43230
USA
Tel: +1 (614) 861 1304
ADB BVBA
Tel: 32/2/722.17.11
Leuvensesteenweg 585
B-1930 Zaventem
Belgium
Fax: 32/2/722.17.64
ADB Airfield Solutions LLC
5500 North Service Road, Suite
1108
Burlington, Ontario L7L 6W6
Canada
Tel:+1 (905) 331 6887
ADB Airfield Technologies Ltd.
China
Room 901, 9F, Fang Heng Intl.
Plaza
Building C, No. 6 Futong East
Road, Chaoyang District
Beijing 100102
P.R. China
Tel: +86 (10) 8476 0106
ADB BVBA
Tel: +49 (0)911 2105 61 60
Niederlassung Deutschland
Von-der-Tann-Str. 31
90439 Nürnberg
Deutschland
Fax: +49 (0)911 2105 61 61
ADB Airfield Solutions, Ltd.
2nd Floor, 3 Rivonia Village
Cnr Mutual Road and Rivonia
Boulevard South
Rivonia 2128
South Africa
Tel: +27 (0) 11 525 9340
ADB Succursale France
Tel: +33 (0) 01 49 89 66 30
22 Avenue des Nations
Parc Silic Roissy-Paris Nord 2,
Immeuble Le Renoir Hall B
93420 Villepinte
France
Fax: +33 (0) 01 49 89 17 81
A-10-01, Level 10
Empire Tower
Jalan SS16/1
45700 Subang Jaya
Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: +603 8941 4868
ADB
Dubai Silicon Oasis
Wing D - Office D-309
P.O. Box 341218
United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971 4372 4970
ADB UK
Suite 4
Fax: +01628784865
110 High Street
Maidenhead Berkshire 
SL6 1PT
United Kingdom
Fax: +1 (614) 864 2069
Web: www.adb-airfield.com
Email: [email protected]
Fax: +1 (905) 331 9389
Web: www.adb-airfield.com
Fax: +86 (10) 8476 0090
Email: [email protected]
Fax: +27 (0) 11 525 9348
Email: [email protected]
Fax: +603 8942 4869
Fax: +971 4372 4975
Customer Services:
+01628672906
Sales & General:
+01628785339
ADB Italia
Via Quasimodo 46
Primo Maggio
40013 Castelmaggiore (BO)
Italia
ADB Equipamentos Para
Aeroportos Ltda
Avenida Moaci n° 395
Conjunto 91
Moema CEP 04083-000
Sao Paulo-SP
Brasil
Tel: +55 (11) 5096-2169
ADB Doha
C/O Watad Group
PO Box 192
Doha, Qatar
Tel: 00974 44 35 38 03
ADB bvba Taiwan Branch
6th floor, No. 283, Section 2 FU
Hsing South Road
Taipei 106
Taiwan R.O.C
Fax:+55 (11) 5049-2304
Fax: 00974 44 35 44 89
ADB Airfield
Solutions USA
977 Gahanna Pkwy
Columbus, Ohio 43230 USA
Telephone: (+1 614-861-1304)
Fax: +1 614-864-2069
www.adb-airfieldsolutions.com
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. ADB reserves the
right to make changes and improvements to its products and assumes no responsibility for making
these modifications on any equipment previously sold.
96A0400 © 2010 ADB Airfield Solutions All Rights Reserved
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement